JP2020018460A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of enhancing game amusement.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine can execute a predetermined performance within unit game execution waiting period, while the predetermined performance is not executed during a termination demonstration period even when game balls enter a predetermined winning port during execution of a special game. When a plurality of game balls have entered the predetermined winning port within a predetermined period in one unit game, the Pachinko game machine can execute a plurality of predetermined performances corresponding to each of the plurality of game balls. Even when there is the plurality of game balls that trigger satisfaction of a specified number exceeding condition within the predetermined period in one unit game, the Pachinko game machine can execute only one specific performance corresponding to only one of the plurality of game balls.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 32

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

  Generally, a pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number for lottery when a game ball enters the starting port, and temporarily stores the random number as an operation reserve ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Such operation-holding balls are sequentially digested one by one each time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a determination is made as to whether or not the ball corresponds to a big hit. If the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the decorative symbol consisting of a plurality of columns is displayed in a variable manner, and then the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is opened. A special game (big hit game) to be set is established.

  This type of pachinko gaming machine is known to execute a special winning opening prize effect (for example, displaying the number of prize balls or outputting a sound effect) when a game ball enters the special winning opening during execution of a special game. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-123602 A

  Since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, it is required to further enhance the interest of the game in order to differentiate from the conventional models.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving amusement of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, a pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a game board having a game area formed therein, a start port provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter, and A winning / decreasing determining means for performing a winning / failing determination in response to the entering of a game ball, and a large winning prize provided in the game area and opened according to the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determining means so that the game ball can enter. Mouth, if the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a big hit, the big winning opening until the number of game balls entered the big winning opening reaches a specified number or until a specified time has elapsed Special game execution means capable of shifting to a special game that repeats a unit game to be opened a plurality of times, an effect display device on which an effect display is displayed, and a sound output device on which an effect sound is output, and the execution period of the special game is , Start running special games A start demo period, which is a period set from the start of execution of the first unit game to the start of execution of the first unit game, a unit game execution period, which is a period from the start of execution of the first unit game to the end of execution of the last unit game, An end demonstration period, which is a period set between the end of execution of the last unit game and the end of execution of the special game, has a predetermined winning port provided in the game area and capable of entering game balls. Then, during the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening, and when the game ball enters the predetermined winning opening during the execution of the special game. Even if there is a termination demonstration period, the predetermined effect is not executed, while if a game ball enters the predetermined winning opening during the execution of the special game, the unit game is not executed after the execution of a certain unit game. Until the next unit game of a certain unit game starts During the unit game execution waiting period, which is a period during which the special winning opening is closed, a predetermined effect is configured to be executed, and a game that enters the special winning opening in one unit game is performed. When the number of balls exceeds the specified number, the specified number is exceeded, and during the execution of the special game, if the specified number exceeded condition is satisfied, the game ball that has entered the special winning opening in one unit game It is possible to execute a specific effect that indicates or informs that the number exceeds the specified number, and the number of game balls entering the predetermined winning opening within a predetermined period in one unit game is plural. In some cases, a plurality of predetermined effects can be executed corresponding to each of the plurality of game balls, while a game that satisfies the above-mentioned prescribed number excess condition within a predetermined period in one unit game. Multiple spheres Even in this case, only one specific effect corresponding to only one of the plurality of game balls can be executed.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a functional block diagram of a main control board and an effect control board of the pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows a special symbol winning / losing lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 1 of a special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 2 of the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 3 of the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the symbol attribute of a decoration symbol. It is a schematic diagram which shows the correspondence of the big hit design combination of a big hit type and a decorative design, and a big hit medium effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of a super longevity production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline | summary of A big hit A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of a big hit B effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of a big hit A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline of a big hit B effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen during a round game. It is a conceptual diagram for explaining the structure of a winning-related effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of an over winning effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of the special winning opening count-up effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of a bonus winning effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of the general winning opening count-up effect. It is a time chart used for explaining the priority of the special winning opening count-up effect. It is a schematic diagram used for explanation of an emphasis production. It is a schematic diagram provided for explanation of error types of gaming machines. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not to execute an over-winning prize at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart for explaining whether or not an extra bonus prize production is performed at the end of the big hit. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the detection state of a touch sensor, an over winning effect, and a general winning effect. It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over winning effect and the bonus prize effect are executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows a volume adjustment screen. It is a time chart used for explanation of overlap execution of an over prize production effect and a bonus prize production effect. It is a time chart in a case where each of an over-winning prize and a bonus prize occurs a plurality of times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters a general winning opening. It is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters the special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows a main control side main process. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a control process of the main control-side main process following FIG. 35. It is a flowchart which shows a main control side timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows winning monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitor control processing. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change start monitoring control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol change start monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol control process. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop symbol display processing. It is a flowchart which shows special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 47 of the special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning effect content determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control side timer interrupt processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an image control command transmission interruption process. It is a figure which shows typically the special symbol winning / losing lottery table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the special symbol big hit symbol table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a transition diagram of a game state and an effect mode of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram used for description of the normal symbol lottery of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing (fluctuation interruption processing, fluctuation forced stop processing) of the second embodiment. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a modification of the second embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
FIGS. 1 and 2 show a front view and a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment. First, with reference to these drawings, an overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be schematically described. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and a first game (a first special symbol game) and a second game are provided. A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic configuration of Pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, a pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as a “gaming machine PM”) has a vertically fixed holding frame having a size of an outer rectangular frame. A front frame 2 which is formed in a rectangular frame size and forms an opening / closing mounting frame is attached by a vertical hinge mechanism 3 disposed on the left edge of the front of each other so as to be able to open and close horizontally and to be detachable, and is attached to the right edge of the front. It is always kept in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected to the outer frame 1 by using a locking device 4 called a double lock provided.

  A rectangular glass frame 5 fitted to the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so as to be openable and closable using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 and is detachably attached. The front frame 2 is always kept in a closed state covering the front surface. A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the front frame 2, and a game area PA on the front of the game board 20 is visibly faced through the multi-layer glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. I have.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light in accordance with the development state of the game and a speaker 11 that generates a sound effect in accordance with the development state of the game are provided. Upper and lower bowls (upper bowl 8 and lower bowl 9) for storing game balls are provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5, and an effect that is pressed by a player at the front center of the upper bowl 8 is provided. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for performing a shooting operation of a game ball is provided on the right front side of the lower ball tray 9. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as “effect button 15”. The effect button 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button-type switch, and an output corresponding to the direction of the operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button) to perform, tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches, touch sensor , Such as a touch panel or any other operation input means.

  The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and an ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which game balls can roll is formed. A guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and a position near the exit opening of the game ball (in the inner rail 42) in the guide passage. At the front end), a ball return preventing valve 43 for preventing a game ball discharged from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again is provided. In this game area PA, together with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various kinds of first starting port 51, second starting port 52, operation gate 53, large winning opening 54, general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64 and the like are provided. In addition to the winning opening, a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, a general symbol reservation lamp 76, and the like. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is provided substantially at the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center decoration 21.

The game area PA has a left area PA1 that is a left area (a board area corresponding to left-handed) of the center decoration 21 and a right area (corresponds to right-handed) of the center decoration 21 with reference to the center decoration 21 in the substantially center. And the right side area PA2). On the upper part of the center decoration 21, a top plate portion 22 that is substantially vertically opposed to the outer rail 41 is integrally formed, and extends between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41 on the extension of the guide passage. A communication passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right area PA2 is formed. In the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left area PA1 is mainly the first starting port 5 arranged below the center decoration 21.
1. The ball can be entered into any of the general winning ports 61 to 63. On the other hand, a game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can be mainly entered into any of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the special winning opening 54 arranged to the right of the center decoration 21. It is. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an out port 29 for discharging game balls that have rolled down without entering each winning port to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each component provided in the game board 20 will be described in order.

  The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting port switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting port 51 is a normally open prize port that is opened upward, and mainly allows game balls (left-handed game balls) flowing down the left area PA1 to enter. Entering a game ball into the first starting port 51 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, a special symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a “first special symbol”.

  The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 51 is provided in the right area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to right-handed, and allows game balls (right-handed game balls) mainly flowing down the right area PA2 to enter. Entering a game ball into the second starting port 52 is a trigger for a second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, a special symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a “second special symbol”. The second starting port 52 includes a normal electric accessory 522 generally called an electric chew, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 523 for driving the normal electric accessory 522 to open and close. The ordinary electric accessory 522 changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the second starting port 52. That is, the ordinary electric accessory 522 has a structure in which a game ball is unlikely to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a later-described predetermined opportunity (an opportunity to win the ordinary symbol lottery). When it is in the open state, the ease of entering a game ball increases. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a movable member 524 of a front-back slide type for opening and closing the second starting port 52. The movable member 524 closes the second starting port 52 to make it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball, and a closed position (projecting position) where the second starting port 52 is opened to allow a game ball to enter. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction perpendicular to the board surface) between an easily opened position (retreat position). The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of at least about one game ball in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to be inclined downward from right to left in front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guide path, and the right and left sides of the guide path can be moved from right to left. And falls down from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

  The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to a normal symbol game, and includes an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of a game ball. Note that the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is a trigger for ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second starting port 52 is to be opened.

  The large winning opening 54 is formed as a winning opening having a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the winning or losing lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 includes a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a large winning prize for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. A mouth solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric accessory 542 changes between an open state in which game balls can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter or difficult to enter the special winning opening 54. In this example, the special winning opening 54 is provided in the right area PA2 of the game area PA. Therefore, in a special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is fired, by hitting the so-called right-handed aiming at the right area PA2, it is easy to enter the big winning opening 54. Has become.

  The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in a left area PA1 which is a board area corresponding to left hitting, and game balls flowing down the left area PA1 can enter. The general winning ports 61 to 63 include a left general winning port switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The left general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like. Entering a ball can be detected.

  The general winning opening 64 is provided in a right area PA2 which is a board area corresponding to a right hit, and a game ball flowing down the right area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 includes a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of game balls into the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not serve as a trigger for a lottery of a special symbol or a normal symbol. However, like other winning ports (except for the operation gate 53), a trigger for acquiring a winning ball. Becomes

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs a change display and a fixed display of the first special symbol when the game ball enters the first starting port 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed in accordance with the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs a change display and a fixed display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. The second special symbol display device 72 includes, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  The first special figure holding lamp 73 and the second special figure holding lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are indicated by lighting / flashing of the lamps. (Up to four each). The number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol is a number related to a random number value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 51 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. The number indicates that the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, the number of times the validity determination is temporarily suspended until the validity determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random number value. Similarly, the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol is calculated based on the random number obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 52 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. The number indicates that the obtained random number value is suspended, that is, the number of times the validity determination is temporarily suspended until the validity determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random number value. I have.

  The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and final display of the normal symbol. The ordinary figure holding lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the lighting number of the lamp corresponds to the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations held (the number of ordinary symbol fluctuations that have not been executed yet). In addition, on the left side of the ordinary symbol display device 75, a round display 77 for displaying the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special motor-operated object 542 operates continuously) is provided. ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes an effect including a fluctuating effect of a decorative pattern which is fluctuated and stopped and displayed in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a forewarning effect for indicating or notifying a degree of expectation of a big hit in advance. An image is displayed, and a hold display corresponding to the operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. More specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display area 700 on which a variation display of a decorative symbol, a notice effect display, and the like are executed, a first special figure holding lamp 73, and a second special figure holding lamp 74. A suspended image display area 710 in which the reserved images of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in synchronization with the variable image display area 720 in which a variable image corresponding to the variable display is displayed is provided. I have. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is employed as the effect display device 70. In the decorative symbol display unit 700, a three-line display area (left symbol display area Z1, middle symbol display area Z2, right symbol display area Z3) serving as a variable display area of a decorative symbol is displayed on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) Is provided, and the right side of the decorative symbol corresponding to the left symbol display area Z1 and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the middle symbol display area Z2 and the right symbol corresponding to the right symbol display area Z3. Each of the symbols is stopped and displayed. The reserved image display unit 710 displays a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the first reserved special operation ball and a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the second special symbol activated reserved ball. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of generation of the special reserved actuation reserved balls (the order of entry), and a maximum of four reserved images for the first special symbol and a maximum of four reserved images for the second special symbol. Display is possible. In addition, in a changing image display area 720, a changing image (a changing icon) corresponding to the currently displayed changing display is displayed.

  The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70 and has functions such as a flow path of a game ball, protection of an effect screen, and decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable role object 24 that executes an effect operation according to the development state of the game. The movable accessory 24 includes a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light in accordance with the development state of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “effect lamp LP”.

  Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, a back set board 30 having a window communicating with the front and rear at the center and having a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape somewhat smaller than the front frame 2 as a base is provided. The front frame 2 is connected to the rear of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so as to be openable and closable and detachable. On this back set board 30, a back set cover 30C having a rectangular box shape with an open front is detachably mounted, and is always disposed so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered with the back set cover 30C).

  Each part of the back set board 30 has a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. , A prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out game balls guided by the ball supply passage 33, and a prize for guiding game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage 35 and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM in general, a production control board 200 for controlling the overall production, an image display according to the game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing the above is mounted. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, a payout control board 400 for controlling the launch and payout of the game ball, and power supply from the game facility side to various control boards and electric power supply to electric / electronic parts. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) for outputting an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, these control boards are respectively mounted at predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30 in an assembled state housed in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. Will be arranged. These control boards and the electric and electronic components of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are connected to each other via a harness (connector cable), so that the pachinko gaming machine PM is operable.

<Control structure of pachinko machine>
Next, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 102 that stores a control program and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area or a buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, a peripheral board and A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 including an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting / outputting a signal to / from a device is mounted. The main CPU 101 plays a game in accordance with a control program stored in a ROM 102. It is configured to execute main control relating to progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is provided with a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and is reset when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs away. A WDT circuit for returning to a normal state, a CTC circuit for enabling real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and operating as a separate system from the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 to generate a predetermined random number (built-in random number) A random number generation circuit and the like are mounted, and these are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 reads out various control programs stored in the ROM 102 based on detection information from each switch and performs arithmetic processing, thereby executing various processings relating to main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage unit that is backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as a stack pointer and each register held when the power is turned off when the power is turned off. In), the state of the gaming machine is returned to the state before power-off based on the information of the backup area.

  The main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning port switch 541, the left general winning port switch 611, the right general winning port switch 641, and the like. , And inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. The main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol reservation lamp 73, a second special symbol reservation lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75, and a general symbol reservation lamp. 76, and also electrically connected to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Transmitted to display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. The external information terminal plate 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (such as a data display or a hall computer) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via the payout control board 300 or the like, for example.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Various effect control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. The effect control board 200 cannot transmit data to the main control board 100, and cannot request the main control board 100 to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processes related to game effects based on an effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores an effect control program and various data, a work area serving as a temporary storage area, An effect control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 including a RAM 203 functioning as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 for inputting and outputting signals to and from peripheral boards and devices is mounted. The sub main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control related to a game effect according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 includes a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and that is reset when the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs away. WDT circuit for restoring to normal state, TPU circuit for outputting various signals based on the system clock, interrupt controller for activating various interrupts such as timer interrupt based on signals from the TPU circuit, etc., and for inputting and outputting serial data A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are mutually connected via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 performs an effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command for instructing the image control board 300 to give an image and a sound, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and an image control command relating to images and sounds is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  The effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 on which a plurality of LED drivers are mounted, and outputs a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronized serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. In synchronization with the clock signal, the ramp control signal is transmitted one bit at a time via the data line. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving an LED drive lamp control signal transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off a switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, control is performed to supply or cut off the drive current to the effect lamp LP, and to turn on or off the effect lamp LP.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by turning on / off a switch in the circuit based on the accessory control drive control signal transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, control is performed to shut off and operate each movable accessory 24. The data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 for performing various arithmetic processing related to image effects based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 storing an image control program and various data, and a work area serving as a temporary storage area. And an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 comprising a RAM 303 functioning as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 for inputting and outputting signals to and from peripheral boards and devices. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control relating to image effects in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 generates a VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301 and a VDP that generates image data based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301. And a sound source IC for generating sound data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and processes the image data to transmit a video signal (image data) generated to the effect display device. The VDP is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads acoustic data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs acoustic data generated by synthesizing the acoustic data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and controls the prize ball payout unit 34 based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out prize balls. Is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the firing mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the firing handle 12 to control the firing of the game ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board based on a primary power supply supplied from a power supply facility on the game island, and a backup power supply. A power supply required for electronic and electric components such as control boards and game machines, comprising a backup power supply circuit for generating power and a power supply cutoff monitoring circuit for monitoring power supply cutoff due to voltage drop. Supply. A power switch for activating a power circuit is connected to the power board 500. Assuming that primary power is supplied from a power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, the power board is turned off. A predetermined power is supplied to each control board and the like from the 500 normal power supply circuits. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been cut off, and when a power supply is detected, outputs a power supply cutoff signal (NMI signal) notifying the fact to the main control board 100. To the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device of the gaming island. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored content of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on is connected to the power supply board 500. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

  The external information terminal plate 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal from the main control board 100. The external information signal which the external information terminal plate 600 outputs to the external device outside the machine as external information includes, for example, a jackpot signal, a signal during a continuous game, a symbol determination signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), and a door. It includes a frame opening signal, a security signal (also referred to as a security information signal), a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (abnormal ball entry time, etc.) signal, and the like. In addition, external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display and a hall computer. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (gaming information) relating to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is a useful judgment material for a player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer tallies the operating state of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on an external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the game store, and It is a device that manages the operation status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without using a data display.

<Basic operation of Pachinko machine>
The pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above is provided for a game with the outer frame 1 fixedly installed on the game island of the gaming facility, the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, and the like being closed and locked. The game is started by storing the game balls in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are sent out to the firing mechanism 14 one by one by a ball feeding mechanism 13 disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. The shooting mechanism 14 launches the game in the game area PA. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated with less than the predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right area PA2 and flows down the left area PA1. In the left area PA1, a left flow path for causing the game balls to flow toward the first starting port 51 and the general winning ports 61 to 63 is formed. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right area PA2 and flows down the right area PA2. In the right area PA2, a right flow path for causing the game balls to flow toward the operation gate 53, the general winning port 64, the second starting port 52, and the special winning port 54 is formed. In this manner, the game balls flowing down the left area PA1 or the right area PA2 are provided with the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operation gate 53 in accordance with the route distributed in the left area PA1 or the right area PA1. If the ball does not enter any of the winning ports 54 or any of the general winning ports 61 to 64, the ball will flow to the out port 29.

  When a game ball flowing down the game area PA enters one of the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, the special winning port 54, and the general winning ports 61 to 63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning port. The ball is paid out to the upper ball tray 8 or the lower ball tray 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, the first starting port 51 is “4” and the second is the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters one of the winning ports (referred to as “unit prize ball number”). The starting port 52 is set to “1”, the general winning ports 61 to 64 are set to “3”, and the special winning port 54 is set to “15”. The unit prize ball number of each winning opening is not limited to the one exemplified in the present embodiment, and another unit prize ball number may be applied. For example, as the unit prize ball number, the first starting port 51 may be “1” instead of “4”. Further, the second starting port 52 may be “three” instead of “one”. Further, the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be “5” instead of “3”. Further, the number of the grand prize openings may be “10” instead of “15”.

  When a game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, a random number value of a special symbol is acquired and the random number value is temporarily stored as a special symbol operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, when a predetermined starting condition (a special symbol change start condition described later) is satisfied, a special symbol hit / fail determination, a symbol determination, and a variation pattern determination are performed on the random number value of the earliest operation-holding ball. In a manner according to the determination result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The change display of the special symbol and the decoration symbol is synchronously stopped and displayed after a lapse of a change time according to the selected change pattern.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is definitely displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit, the game shifts to a special game (big hit game) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of the big hit game, an opening / closing operation of changing the big winning port 54 to the open state only once or a plurality of times is performed. When the specified number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 or when the opening time of the special winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time, the round game being executed ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the types of the three symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, when a predetermined big hit is won, the special symbol probability changing function may be activated from the end of the big hit game until the number of times the special symbol changes reaches the predetermined end number. When the special symbol probability change function is activated, the special symbol lottery jackpot probability changes from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new jackpot (big hit game) is generated relatively early. Become. The special symbol probability changing function may be continued until the next big hit occurs. In addition, “10000 times”, which is substantially equivalent to the number of times of variable display until the next big hit occurrence, may be set as the predetermined end number.

  In addition, after the big hit game ends, the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function may be operated in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol probability changing function. When the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time is improved. Easy acquisition).

  Further, after the big hit game is over, the electric chew support function (also simply referred to as “electric sapo”) may be operated in conjunction with or independent of the special symbol fluctuation time reducing function. The electric-chu support function activates the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time reduction function, and the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522, thereby facilitating entry into the second starting port 52. This is the state (also referred to as the “ball entry state”). When the normal symbol probability variation function is activated, the normal symbol win probability becomes higher than in the normal state. When the normal symbol fluctuation time reducing function is activated, the normal symbol fluctuation time is reduced. When the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 operates, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 becomes longer than in the normal state. In this easy ball entry state, the possibility that the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol per fixed time increases more than usual increases, and the ease of ball entry into the second starting port 52 also increases. The possibility that the number of entering balls increases will also increase. Therefore, the operation of the electric chew support function increases the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting port 52 during that period, so that the game can be continued with almost no decrease in the number of balls held. Become. That is, the “base”, which is the ratio of the number of award balls to the number of launched balls of game balls, increases. In the following, the state in which the electric tuner support function is operating is also referred to as “high base state”, and the state in which the electric tuner support function is not operating is also referred to as “low base state”.

<Main functions of Pachinko machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / the production control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200).

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 includes, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball entry determination unit 110, a game lottery random number generation unit 120, a hold control unit 130, a preliminary determination unit 135, a special symbol lottery processing unit 140, a normal symbol lottery processing unit 145, It includes special game control means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, game state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, and command transmission / reception means 190. The above-described units in the main control board 100 are configured by hardware such as a main CPU 101, a ROM 102, a RAM 103, and an electronic circuit provided on the main control board 100, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

The winning determination unit 110 determines each winning opening based on detection signals from the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switches 611, 641, and the like. Is determined to enter a game ball. When the first ball switch 511 detects the entry of a game ball, the ball determination unit 110 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “first ball winning command”) indicating that, and When the game ball is detected to be entered by the 2 start port switch 521, an effect control command (referred to as “second start port winning command”) indicating this is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 detects the effect of the game ball. When passing is detected, an effect control command (referred to as “operation gate winning command”) indicating that is generated, and when a game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, this is indicated. When an effect control command (referred to as a “large winning opening winning command”) is generated and a game ball is detected by the left general winning opening switch 611, an effect controlling command (“left general winning opening”) indicating that is detected. Winning frame When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 611, an effect control command (referred to as a “right general winning opening winning command”) indicating that is generated. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180.

The game lottery random number generation means 120 is used for a special symbol winning / falling lottery by fetching a built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software and adding a soft random number per special symbol described later to this. Generate random numbers per special symbol. The game lottery random number generation means 120 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As the software random number, a soft random number per special symbol to be added to the above-mentioned built-in random number to generate a hit random number, an initial value for a new update to be made after one cycle of updating of the soft random number per special symbol is completed Special initial value random number, special symbol stop symbol random number, special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the hit symbol (combination of symbols that will activate the condition device) as a special symbol stop symbol A special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining an initial value for making a new update after one cycle of the update is completed, a special symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol, An initial value for a new update to be made after one cycle of the normal random number per symbol and one cycle of the normal random number per symbol has been completed Determining normal symbol per initial value random number for, and the like normal symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting the change pattern of the normal symbol. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of a prime number, etc.), and for the initial random number, while the timer interrupt process is not being executed ( (During loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

  The holding control means 130 includes a special symbol holding control means 131 and a normal symbol holding control means 132.

  The special symbol holding control means 131 is a random number value per special symbol, a random number value per special symbol, which is a lottery random number value related to a special symbol game, when a game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52. A symbol random number value and a special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 combines the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (four) with the entering order of the holding balls in the main information storage means. 180 is temporarily stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area.

  The first special symbol hold storage area and the second special symbol hold storage area have a hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), a hold 2 storage area (2 A third storage area (a third storage area), a third storage area (a third storage area), and a fourth storage area (a fourth storage area) are provided. Each holding storage area can store a special symbol random number, a special symbol random number, and a special symbol changing pattern random number as a set as operating ball information. The operation pending sphere information is stored in the order of the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, the pending 4 storage area, while the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, the pending 4 storage. Digested in order of territory (first in first out principle). When the reserved sphere information in the reserved 1 storage area is digested, the reserved sphere information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area are shifted to lower-numbered storage areas, respectively. The contents of the hold 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  Further, the special symbol holding control means 131 includes a first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, and a second special ball holding counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter every time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired as the update processing of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol, and one operation holding ball is consumed. Each time, the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

  Also, when the special symbol holding control means 131 updates (addition or subtraction) the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, an effect control command (“symbol storage”) including the update information of the number of holding balls is updated. (Referred to as "number command") and temporarily store it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This one command includes information on both the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol. It should be noted that, in principle, the operation-holding balls of each special symbol are digested in the order in which they entered, but in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the first special symbol. In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation-holding ball relating to the second special symbol game is present, the operation-holding relating to the second special symbol game is performed regardless of the existence of the operation-holding ball relating to the first special symbol game. It is configured to preferentially digest the sphere. In addition, under this priority digestion, when the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol exists, even if the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol is digested. Will be suspended.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132, when the game ball enters the operation gate 53, triggers a random number per lot for the normal symbol game, a random number per symbol, a symbol random value per symbol, and a symbol variation pattern. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation-holding ball information of a normal symbol. The ordinary symbol holding control unit 132 stores the operation-holding ball information of the ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180 in a form in which the information is combined with a predetermined upper limit number (four) of the entering balls of the reserved symbols. Remember temporarily. Further, the ordinary symbol holding control means 132 has an ordinary symbol retaining ball number counter for counting the number of operation retaining balls of the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol holding control means 132 increments the corresponding counter by one each time one operation-holding ball of a normal symbol is acquired, and one operation-holding ball is digested as an update process of the number of holding balls of the normal symbol. Each time, the corresponding counter is decremented by one.

The pre-judgment means 135 executes the pre-judgment for the pre-reading notice for the operation-holding ball when the operation-holding ball of the special symbol is acquired at a predetermined pre-judgment timing. As an example of the above-described pre-determination timing, (1) when waiting for hitting, and when the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not operating, (2) waiting for hitting, and Either one of the following cases: when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired while the electric-chu support function is operating, or (3) when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired during a big hit or a small hit. It is time to satisfy the conditions. The above-mentioned pre-determination timing is an example, and the pre-determination timing is changed in accordance with the gaming machine specification (for example, a starting opening according to the second special symbol having no ordinary electric accessory is normally reserved for eight pieces. (1) may be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc. in a model in which is stored, or a specification in which a preliminary determination is always performed without providing a preliminary determination timing. Good. In addition, in each game state, only the operation-holding ball of the special symbol that is the main player of the game may be the target of the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol is the object of the preliminary determination. In the time-saving game state, the latent probability change game state, and the probability change game state, it is preferable that only the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is a target of the preliminary determination. More specifically, the preliminary determination unit 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the operation-holding ball acquired this time from the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area of the main information storage unit 180, and The preliminary determination (priority determination of hit / fail), the preliminary determination of the symbol (preliminary symbol determination), and the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (variation pattern preliminary determination) are sequentially performed. The preliminary determination table used in each preliminary determination is not shown, but an area corresponding to the total number of random numbers is divided into a plurality of areas in each of the hit / fail preliminary determination table, the symbol preliminary determination table, and the variation pattern preliminary determination table. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as “prior determination number”)) is assigned to each area (determination number). For this reason, the result of the preliminary determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (the result of the winning / failing determination, the result of the symbol determination, the result of the fluctuation pattern determination). It should be noted that the pass / fail judgment table and the symbol pre-judgment table may be the same as the pass / fail lottery table and the symbol lottery table used for the lottery when actually starting to change. Here, the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination table may change the game situation at the start of the fluctuation (whether there is a probable change, whether there is a shortened time, whether or not during the limited frequency period referring to the special table, the number of reserved balls, etc.). For this reason, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions is included. Further, as a modified example, the random number value in a register or the like on the main CPU 101 temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol holding storage area or the second special symbol holding storage area is determined in advance. May be. Then, the preliminary determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as “preliminary determination command”) including information on the result of the preliminary determination (prior determination number), and sequentially generates this command in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. To store.

  The special symbol lottery processing unit 140 includes a special symbol hit / fail determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determination unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140 stores the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first storage area (reservation 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180 when the change start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. The stored random number value per special symbol, symbol random number value per special symbol, and special symbol variation pattern random value are read out and stored in a special symbol success / failure determination area, special symbol design determination area, and special symbol variation pattern in the main information storage unit 180. Each is stored in the judgment area. Here, "the change start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied" means that (A1) the big hit is not in progress, (A2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the change standby state, (A3) This is when all the conditions of the presence of the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol are satisfied. Also, "the change start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied" means that (B1) the big hit is not in progress, (B2) the first special symbol and the second special symbol are in the change standby state, (B3) This is when all the conditions of the existence of the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol are satisfied. When the change start condition of the first special symbol and the change start condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the change start condition of the second special symbol is preferentially processed based on the priority digestion. I do.

  The special symbol hit determination unit 141 reads out a random number per special symbol from the special symbol hit determination area of the main information storage unit 180 and performs a hit determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of a big hit, a small hit, and a miss. Decide what to do. The result of the success / failure determination is temporarily stored in a special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 (for example, the big hit data “55H”, the small hit data “33H”, and the outlier data “00H”), and is used in the subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the special symbol stops changing. The special symbol win / fail determination means 141 holds a special symbol win / fail lottery table which is referred to at the time of this win / fail determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / losing lottery table. FIG. 5A is referred to in a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated (low probability state), and FIG. 5B is a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated (high probability). State). The special symbol win / fail lottery table associates the random number range of the random number value per special symbol with the result (big hit / miss) of the special symbol win / fail determination. As shown in FIG. 5, in the game state (low-probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated in the special symbol win / fail determination, the random number per special symbol falls in the range of “0 to 204”. In the gaming state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating, the special symbol is a big hit if the random number per special symbol falls in the range of “0 to 1506”. That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the winning probability of the big hit is changed from the low probability “1 / 319.69” to the high probability “1/4”.
3.49 ". As described above, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is set to be equal in the first special symbol hit determination and the second special symbol hit determination. In the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as a result of the special symbol hit determination, but "small hit" may be set as a result of the special symbol hit determination. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low-probability state, high-probability state).

  The special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the result of the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 is a first special symbol big hit symbol table and a second special symbol big hit symbol which are referred to when determining the big hit symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol big hit symbol table. In the present embodiment, “specific jackpot” means a jackpot (probably variable jackpot) that triggers the probability variation function of a special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and “normal jackpot” means a special symbol after the jackpot game ends. Means a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) that does not trigger the probability variation function of.

  In the present embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probable change game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the gaming state, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is referred to as a “probable variation state” or a “probability variation gaming state,” 2) A game state in which the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol probability variation function being activated is referred to as a "time reduction state" or a "time reduction game state". A state in which the function is not operating is referred to as a “normal state” or a “normal game state”. Here, it can be said that the “probable change game state” and the “time reduction game state” are more advantageous game states for the player than the “normal game state”. Therefore, hereinafter, as the gaming state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal gaming state, the probability-change gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are also referred to as “advantageous gaming state”.

  Each game state is determined by a combination of an operation state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and an operation state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). The probable game state can be expressed as a "high-probability high-base state", the (2) time-saving game state can be expressed as a "low-probability high-base state", and the (3) normal game state can be expressed as a "low-probability low-base state". In addition, the operation state of the probability variation function is a high probability state, while the operation state of the electric tue support function is a low base state of a game state (a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the "normal game state"). 1), such a gaming state may be referred to as a latent gaming state, and the latent gaming state may be expressed as a “high-probability low-base state”. This latent game state (“highly accurate low base state”) is a game state suitable for playing mainly small hits, and will be described later in detail. As for these states (combination state of low probability / high probability and low base / high base), unless otherwise specified, a gaming state in a state in which a large hit or a small hit is not being performed (acceptance determination / variable display is possible) State), during the big hit, the low probability low base state, and during the small hit, the gaming state is the same as the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning. At this time, the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is a state in which the variation time of the special symbol which is the main player of the game in at least the gaming state among the first special symbol and the second special symbol is reduced. Means that. That is, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol change time reducing function is activated, at least the first special symbol change time (in the normal game state) in which the change display of the first special symbol is the main game. The average fluctuation time) is shortened, and in the game state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the main game (probable change game state, latent probable game state, time saving game state), at least the fluctuation time (average fluctuation) of the second special symbol Time).

In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is (1) a big hit type (a type of a symbol group), and (2) a game at the time of the big hit winning. It is determined according to the state. The number of times each game state is continued (the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated) is the number of times the special symbol probability variation function is activated (referred to as the “probability variation frequency”) and the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated. It is set according to the number of times (referred to as “variable time reduction number”) and the number of times that the electric chew support function is activated (referred to as “electrical support number”). In the present embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function start operating at the same time and end the operation at the same time, so that the “variation time reduction number” and the “electric support number” are the same number. (Therefore, in FIG. 6, “the number of times of fluctuation time reduction” and “the number of times of electric support operation” are described in the same column).

  FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table. In the first special symbol big hit symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit type, a probability variation frequency, a variation time reduction frequency (electric support frequency), a specified number of rounds of the big hit game, and each round with respect to the symbol random value per special symbol The opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the stop symbols are omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol big hit table, two types of big hit types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, as two types of big hits (symbol group), they are sorted into 4R specific big hits (symbol group A) and 4R regular big hits (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group A)
In the case of winning the first special symbol "4R specific big hit (symbol group A)", the number of times of probability variation is set to "10000", the number of times of change in the variation time is set to "10000", and the number of electric support is set to "10000". Is set as the game state after the end of the game. In this probable changing game state, an enormous number of "10000 times" is set as the number of times of continuation (the number of times of change in probability, the number of times of change in time of change, and the number of times of electric support). Cannot be probabilistically (to win at about 1/44), and thus will be substantially continued until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol “4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)” is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is “4 rounds”, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

(4R regular big hit: symbol group B)
When the first special symbol "4R normal big hit (symbol group B)" is won, the probability change frequency "0", the fluctuation time reduction frequency "100", the electric support frequency "100" are set, and the big hit game Is set as the game state after the end of the game. This time-saving gaming state is continued until the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed reaches 100 or until the next big hit occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100, the transition from the next special symbol change display to the normal game state is made. Also, when the first special symbol “4R normal big hit (symbol group B)” is won, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is “4 rounds”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

  FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. In the second special symbol big hit symbol table, a symbol group, a big hit type, a probability variation frequency, a variation time reduction frequency (electric support frequency), a specified number of rounds of the big hit game, each round with respect to the symbol random value per special symbol The opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is associated with each other (in this example, the stop symbols are omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, the three types of jackpot types (symbol group) are classified into 16R specific jackpots (symbol group C), 4R specific jackpots (symbol group D), and 4R regular jackpots (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: symbol group C)
In the case of winning the second special symbol “16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)”, the probability change frequency “1”
0000 times ", the number of times of fluctuation time reduction" 10000 times ", and the number of power support" 10000 times "are set, and the probable change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. As described above, this probable change game state is set to an enormous number of "10000 times" as its continuation number, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. Also, when the second special symbol "16R specific big hit (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is "4 rounds" and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is "29 seconds". In addition, the 16R specific jackpot may be a specification in which the first special symbol is won, and in that case, it is harder to win than the second special symbol (for example, 5% of all the jackpot symbols, In one special symbol, it is preferable that the 16R specific jackpot is 5%, the 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and the 4R normal jackpot is 35%.

(4R specific jackpot: symbol group D)
In the case of winning the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)", the number of times of probability variation is set to "10000", the number of times of variation is shortened to "10000", and the number of electric support is set to "10000". Is set as the game state after the end of the game. As described above, this probable change game state is set to an enormous number of "10000 times" as its continuation number, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. Also, when the second special symbol “4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)” is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is “4 rounds”, and the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: symbol group E)
In the case of winning the second special symbol “4R normal big hit (symbol group E)”, the probability change frequency “0”, the fluctuation time reduction frequency “100”, the electric support frequency “100” are set, and the big hit game Is set as the game state after the end of the game. This time-saving gaming state is continued until the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed reaches 100 or until the next big hit occurs within this 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches 100, the transition from the next special symbol change display to the normal game state is made. Also, when the second special symbol “4R normal big hit (symbol group E)” is won, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game is “4 rounds”, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is "29 seconds".

Here, in the present embodiment, three types of jackpot types are provided: a 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), a 4R specific jackpot (symbol groups A and D), and a 4R regular jackpot (symbol groups B and E). Have been. The expected value of winning a prize ball in a special game (referred to as “expected prize ball obtaining value”) is 16R specific jackpot> 4R specific jackpot = 4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual round number of the special game when the big hit is won in the first special symbol is “4 rounds”, whereas the real round number of the special game when the big hit is won in the second special symbol is “ 16 rounds ", there is a high possibility that the game will shift to a special game with a larger number of rounds in the case where a big hit occurs in the second special symbol than in the case where a big hit occurs in the first special symbol. This is advantageous for the player in that a ball can be obtained. The actual round number of the special game corresponds to the number of executions of the “long open round game” set for the special game. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is a fixed time of 29 seconds (although all rounds are referred to as “long opening round games”), but a predetermined round during the same jackpot game is performed. Alternatively, in all rounds, a “short opening round game” in which the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 54 is shortened to 2 seconds is provided, and even if the number of rounds of the big hit game is the same, substantially You may employ | adopt the structure which has the big hit with different round numbers (the big hit with different real round numbers). In the long opening round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is set such that game balls of a prescribed count (full count = 10 balls) can enter or easily enter the special winning opening 54. It is a round game. In the short opening round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is a round in which game balls of a specified count (full count = 10 balls) are set in the large winning opening 54 as impossible to enter or difficult to enter. It is a game.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the random number value of the special symbol variation pattern. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol variation pattern determination unit 143 selects any variation pattern table from a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of types of variation patterns. In each figure, “selection rate” is shown for convenience of explanation, but actually, a judgment value (range of random number values) for determining a fluctuation pattern is set in accordance with a special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value. The variation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the variation pattern random number value belongs to. The various fluctuation patterns are premised on that the fluctuation time is associated with each fluctuation pattern as an end condition of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is also executed in the fluctuation time. .

  Here, the variation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when a variation pattern (variation pattern table) is selected. In this example, a “normal selection state”, a “time reduction selection state”, and a “probable change selection state” are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a fluctuation pattern selection state set corresponding to a game state (normal game state) in which none of the special symbol probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function are activated. In the time saving selection state, the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, but the variation set in accordance with the gaming state (the time reduction gaming state) in which the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated. It is in the pattern selection state. The probable change selection state is a fluctuating pattern selection state set corresponding to a game state (probable change game state) in which all of the special symbol probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time reduction function, and electric tue support function are operating.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the special pattern variation pattern table has different reference columns for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and obtains the same special symbol variation pattern random value. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of the operation holding balls described in each figure (“0 holding”, “1 to 2 holdings”, “3 holdings”) is the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, It means the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-reserved balls after reservation and digestion), and in the case of a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol (after reservation and digestion) (The number of operation reserve balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls existing at the time of the lottery of the change pattern (at the start of the change display / after the holding display) (excluding the operation-holding ball digested by the change display). . In addition, as a modified example thereof, a total value of the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

  The fluctuation effect of the decoration symbol performed in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. FIGS. 7 to 9 also show the contents of the fluctuation effects set corresponding to each fluctuation pattern (variation time) for reference. In the figure, "Super shortened fluctuation", "Shortened fluctuation", and "Normal fluctuation" are effects in which the decorative patterns in three rows fluctuate, and do not go through the reach state at all, and become "out of shape" at the so-called breakaway. It is. Hereinafter, the super-shortened fluctuation, the shortened fluctuation, and the normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as “non-reach loss”. The non-reach out-of-reach types are different from each other in that the fluctuation display is stopped in a shorter time than in the normal fluctuation and in the ultra-short fluctuation than in the short fluctuation.

“N-reach (normal reach)” is a state where the same decorative pattern is stopped in two rows (generally the left and right rows) of three decorative patterns (reach state), and the remaining one row (common) In this case, if a different decorative pattern is stopped in the middle row of the game, the result is "out", and if the same decorative pattern is stopped in the remaining row (generally, the middle row), a "big hit" is produced.

  “SP Reach (Super Reach)” is a reach production that has a higher expectation of a big hit than the above-mentioned N-reach, and evolves from N-reach after the reach is established. Is an effect that is displayed. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as types of SP reach. SP reach A is a reach effect executed when the game state currently being executed is the normal state. SP reach B is a reach effect that is executed when the game state currently being executed is the time saving game state. SP reach C is a reach effect that is executed when the currently executed game state is the certain-variable game state. In the variation pattern type of the present embodiment, it is set so that the big hit expectation increases in the order of “non-reach” <“N-reach” <“SP-reach”. As a modified example, the effect contents of SP reach may be the same (SP reach A) in the normal state and the time saving game state, and may be different SP reach (SP reach C) in the case of the positive change game state. Further, as another modified example, a variation pattern including a pseudo run may be prepared. Pseudo-run means that the decorative symbol is temporarily changed (simulated stop, temporarily stopped) and re-variable displayed during one variation display of the decorative symbol, so that the variable symbol is displayed multiple times in a pseudo manner. (Pseudo continuous production, pseudo fluctuation production, pseudo continuous fluctuation production, re-variation production). In other words, the pseudo-run is an effect in which the pseudo-variation in which all three decorative symbols start to fluctuate or re-fluctuate and then temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped is executed a plurality of times. The greater the number of pseudo runs (the number of pseudo fluctuations), the higher the possibility of developing SP reach with a high jackpot expectation.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the normal selection state. The variation pattern table 1 is configured such that the contents of the table differ depending on the result (big hit, miss) of the special symbol hit / fail judgment.

  In the variation pattern table 1 for outliers, variation patterns PH1-1 (short variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set. Here, when the result of the determination of the first special symbol is “out”, the variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N-reach), PH1-4. (SP reach A) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-reserved balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. Are set so as to be different from each other, so that even if the obtained special symbol change pattern random number values are the same, different change patterns can be selected. Specifically, as the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol is larger, the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short is easily selected, and the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol is reduced. The smaller the number is, the easier it is to select a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is “losing”, the variation time is relatively independent of the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. A fluctuation pattern PH1-1 (short fluctuation) or PH1-2 (normal fluctuation) which is set to be short in time is selected. Note that, as a modification, when the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol is correct is “losing”, only the main variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation is selected without depending on the number of operation suspensions of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation may be most easily selected (the selection ratio is preferably the same regardless of the number of operation-reserved balls in the second special symbol).

In the big hit variation pattern table 1, variation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time reduction selection state. The variation pattern table 2 is configured such that the contents of the table differ depending on the result (big hit or miss) of the special symbol determination.

  In the variation pattern table 2 for outliers, variation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-short variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set. . Here, in the case where the result of the determination as to whether or not the first special symbol is correct is a loss, the variation pattern PH2- is not dependent on the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. 2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), or PH2-4 (SP reach A). That is, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is incorrect, the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra shortened variation) is selected regardless of how many operation-holding balls of the first special symbol exist. Never. On the other hand, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is “out”, the variation patterns PH2-1 (ultra shortened variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4. (SP reach B) is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol is correct is “losing”, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-reserved balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the second special symbol. Are set so as to be different from each other, so that even if the obtained special symbol change pattern random number values are the same, different change patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH2-1 (ultra shortened fluctuation) is not selected, and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol exists. In this case, the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) tends to be more easily selected as the number of operation-holding balls in the second special symbol increases.

  In the big hit variation pattern table 2, the variation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the probable variation selection state. The contents of the variation pattern table 3 are different depending on the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit / miss).

In the variation pattern table 3 for outliers, variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-short variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set. Here, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is "losing", the variation pattern PH3- does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol. 2 (normal fluctuation) or PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. That is, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is incorrect, the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra shortened variation) is selected regardless of how many operation-holding balls of the first special symbol exist. Never. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol pass / fail determination is out of order, the variation patterns PH3-1 (extremely shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH
3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. At this time, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is out of order, the reference destination is determined according to the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol (specifically, according to the presence or absence of the operation-reserved ball of the second special symbol). Are set so as to be different from each other, so that even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random numbers are the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, the fluctuation pattern PH3-1 (ultra shortened fluctuation) is not selected, and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol exists. The variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) can be selected only when there is an operation-holding ball of the second special symbol, rather than when there is no operation-holding ball of the second special symbol. In this case, a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time tends to be more easily selected.

  In the variation pattern table 3 for the big hit, a variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set. Here, if the result of the first special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big hit type (4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Similarly, when the result of the second special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is not dependent on the big hit type (16R specific big hit, 4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Selected.

  As described above, the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 3 define the fluctuation time of the special symbol for each fluctuation pattern. Display time) is set to “0.5 seconds”. Note that the special symbol fixed stop time (fixed display time) is a time during which the special symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed (time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In the present embodiment, the fluctuating time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set corresponding to the fluctuating time and the fixed stop time of the special symbol. In addition, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the same effect contents and fluctuation time as at the time of the big hit can be obtained, but it is preferable to make the final effect content different at the time of the big hit from the time of the big hit. In other words, even with the same N-reach, the decorative pattern becomes a zigzag at the time of the big hit (eg, “7.7.7”), while the decorative pattern loses the reach at the time of the loss (eg, “7.8”). 7 ") or the same SP Reach A-C, the big hits will result in the final production content indicating success, and the decorative pattern will be zoro eyes (eg: ally character wins enemy character) After that, “7 ・ 7 ・ 7” is displayed), but in the event of a loss, the final rendering content will be a rendering content indicating failure, and the decorative pattern will be out of reach (eg, the ally character is an enemy character) Or "7.8.7" is displayed afterwards). Also, it is preferable that the fluctuation time (production time) is long, even if the contents of the production are the same (when developed to the same SP reach) as compared to the time of the loss at the time of the big hit. It is preferable that the SP reaches A to C at the time of the big hit have a fluctuation time (production time) longer by 10 seconds than the SP reach A to C at the time of the loss.

  The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects the variation pattern of the special symbol, and then instructs the effect control board 200 to start the variation of the decorative symbol, so that the communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. Effect control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not, effect control command (fluctuation additional information designation command) including special symbol fluctuation addition pattern (information for adding and subtracting fluctuation time), special symbol fluctuation pattern An effect control command including information (a fluctuation pattern designating command), an effect control command including a character effect number (a symbol group and a game state) (a symbol designating command), and the like are generated (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as “ This is referred to as a “change start command”) and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 includes a normal symbol hit / fail determination means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145, when the fluctuation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, reads out the random number per normal symbol and the random value of the normal symbol variation pattern stored in the first storage area in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, These are stored in the normal symbol hit / fail determination area and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, respectively. Here, the “normal symbol change start condition” means (1) that the normal symbol is in a change waiting state, and (2) that there is an operation holding ball of the normal symbol. When all the conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state where the fluctuation can be started (a state where the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

  The normal symbol hit / fail determination unit 146 reads out a random number value per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit / fail determination area of the main information storage unit 180, and executes a normal symbol hit / fail judgment. The judgment result is either “hit” or “miss”. Is determined. The result of the determination of the success or failure of the ordinary symbol is temporarily stored in the ordinary symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, and is used in the subsequent processing, and is cleared when the variation of the ordinary symbol is stopped. The normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 146 holds a normal symbol hit / fail lottery table (not shown) which is referred to at the time of the hit judgment of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hit probability is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is activated. Is set to "2999/3001".

  The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and determines whether a predetermined hit symbol (a trigger for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate) when the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination is a hit. If the result of the determination of the correctness of the normal symbol is a loss, a predetermined loss symbol (a stop symbol that does not trigger the activation of the ordinary electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, while the symbol A and the symbol B are assigned as the hit symbols of the ordinary symbol, the symbol C is assigned as the outlier symbol of the ordinary symbol.

  The normal symbol variation pattern determination unit 148 reads out the ordinary symbol variation pattern random number value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180, and refers to an unillustrated ordinary symbol variation pattern table to change the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol. (Fluctuation time) is determined. The normal symbol fluctuation time is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (ordinary symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is not activated, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) Is set to “0.2 seconds” when is operating. Regardless of which variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is selected, the fixed stop time (determination display time) of the ordinary symbol is set to “0.1 second”. The normal symbol confirmation stop time (confirmation display time) is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In the control of the ordinary symbols, when the electric tue support function is not activated in order to reduce the processing load on the main control board 100, the hit probability of the determination of the acceptability of the ordinary symbols is set to “0”, and the ordinary symbols are set. It is also conceivable to adopt a specification that makes the fluctuation time of a single variable.

  Further, the ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 determines an opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 according to the result of the determination of the success or failure of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145 holds a regular electric accessory opening pattern table which is referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522. The opening pattern (opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to “0.2 seconds” when the electric chew support function (open extension function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (open extension function) is set. If it is operating, "5.8 seconds" is set. In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522 may be different depending on the type of the hit symbol of the normal symbol. For example, when the electric chew support function (opening extension function) is operating as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is the symbol A, "3 seconds opening × 1 time → 2. 8 seconds open × 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds) ”, and if the hit symbol of the normal symbol is symbol B,“ 2.8 seconds open × 1 time → 3 seconds open × 1 time (total open time 5 times) .8 seconds). "

When the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the special game control means 150 executes a big hit start demonstration and a big hit end demonstration execution time (demo time) according to the determined big hit type (symbol group); The execution time (round time) of the round game is determined. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 to execute a big hit start demonstration effect (referred to as a "big hit start demo command") and a big hit end demonstration effect. An effect control command (referred to as a "big hit end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Note that the jackpot start demonstration command is also used as an opportunity for the effect control board 200 to determine the contents of a series of jackpot medium effects (jackpot start demonstration effect, round effect, jackpot end demonstration effect) developed during the jackpot game. Become. Further, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “round effect designation command”) for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the special winning opening 54, and the like. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is set to 5 seconds and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time (demo time) of the end demo, not only the big hit type (symbol group) but also the big hit type (symbol group) depending on the game state at the time of the big hit winning, the big hit start demo and the big hit The execution time (demo time) of the end demonstration may be different. For example, assuming the specification that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special symbol, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds for the 4R normal jackpot when the jackpot is hit in the low probability and low base state (as the jackpot start demonstration effect) The execution time of the big hit end demonstration is 15 seconds (the big hit end demonstration effect, the effect B-1 displayed as "rush hour mode entry" and the prepaid). While a card (* a storage medium storing information about the amount of money required to borrow a game ball for a game) is used to perform an effect C that warns about forgetting to take a game ball, a high probability high base state or a low probability When the jackpot is hit in the high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is set to 5 seconds (the effect A-1 is executed as the jackpot start demonstration effect), and when the jackpot end demonstration is executed. Is 10 seconds (the effect B-1 is executed as the end of the jackpot, and the effect C is not executed). For the 16R specific jackpot and the 4R specific jackpot, if the jackpot is hit in the low probability low base state, the jackpot start demonstration The execution time of the big hit end demonstration is 5 seconds (the execution of the effect A-2 in which "the start of the big hit big hit" is displayed as the big hit start demonstration effect), and the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is 20 seconds (the big hit end demonstration effect, "the positive change mode In this case, the effect B-2 and the effect C displayed as “rush-in” are executed), and when a large hit is made in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state, the execution time of the big hit start demonstration is 5 seconds (the big hit start demo). As an effect, the effect A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is 10 seconds (as the big hit end demonstration effect, the effect B-3 displayed as “Continuation of the probable change mode” is executed. Presentation C may be not executed). In addition, it is assumed that the 16R specific jackpot is also won in the first special symbol, and if the first special symbol is a big hit, the execution time of the big hit start demonstration is 5 seconds (regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit) (16R specific big hit) 5R for each of the 4R specific jackpot and the 4R regular jackpot, the effect A-1 or the effect A-2 is executed as the jackpot start demonstration effect, and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 30 seconds (16R specific jackpot and For 4R specific jackpot, in 30 seconds, the effect B-2 and effect C are executed as the big hit end demonstration effect. However, for the 4R normal big hit, it is 15 seconds, and the effect B-1 and effect C are used as the big hit end demonstration effect. On the other hand, if the jackpot is the second special symbol, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (16R specific jackpot, 4R special jackpot) regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. The jackpot and the 4R regular jackpot each have a duration of 5 seconds, and as the jackpot start demonstration effect, the effect A-1 or the effect A-2 is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 20 seconds (16R specific jackpot and 4R specific jackpot) About 20 seconds, the effect B-3 is executed as the big hit end demonstration effect, and the effect C is not executed. However, the 4R normal big hit is set to 10 seconds, and the big hit end demonstration effect is executed as the effect B-1. The effect C may not be executed). The relationship between the time values is an example, and the time value is not limited to the above as long as the magnitude relationship between the demonstration times in each situation is the same as described above. In any of the above specifications, the effect C does not occur when a large hit is made in the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state. However, during the change or the big hit game (during the special game) related to the big hit. In the case where the power is cut off and the power is restored during the fluctuation or the big hit game, the effect C may be generated exceptionally.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and displays the first special symbol after the variation display. Let it. Further, the special symbol display control means 156 causes the second special symbol to be variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 72 in accordance with the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variable time, fixed display time) related to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm the display of the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes “0”). (Hereinafter referred to as a “fluctuation stop command”). The ordinary symbol display control means 157 causes the ordinary symbol display device 75 to variably display the ordinary symbol in accordance with the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the ordinary symbol, and causes the ordinary symbol to be definitely displayed after the variation display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) related to the display of the normal symbol. The operation state of the ordinary symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the ordinary symbol game status of the main information storage unit 180.

  Further, the special symbol display control means 156 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “standby demo command”) that triggers execution of a standby demonstration effect (customer wait demonstration effect) when the interruption state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more. Generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. The phrase "the game interruption state continues for a predetermined time or more" means that a period in which there is no operation holding ball of a special symbol and no special symbol change display is performed is continued for a predetermined time or more. In addition, when the period during which the game ball is not fired continues for a predetermined time or longer, or when the period when the game ball does not enter all winning ports continues for a predetermined time or more, the interrupted state of the game is longer than a predetermined time. The specification may be continued.

  If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric auditors solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after the special symbol is determined and displayed, and The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the big hit game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is set as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed by a specified number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a special winning opening opening counter for storing the number of times of operation of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of running rounds). Here, the operation termination condition (the unit game termination condition) of the special electric accessory 542 in the big hit game is that the game ball of a prescribed count (in this embodiment, “10”) has entered the big winning port 54. Or that the opening time of the special winning opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time (“29 seconds” in the present embodiment).

In addition, when the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination corresponds to a hit, the electric accessory control unit 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523, and the ordinary electric accessory 522 (the (2) Open / close control of the starting port 52). Here, as described above, the electric accessory control unit 160 opens the ordinary electric accessory 522 for 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric tue support function (open extension function) is not activated. Then, in the high base state in which the electric tue support function (open extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (in this embodiment, “10”) of game balls have entered the second starting port 52 or that the second starting port 52 The opening time has reached the maximum opening time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in the present embodiment).

  When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the gaming state control means 165 determines the big hit game based on the big hit type (type of the symbol group) and the game state at the time of the big hit winning. Is determined, and the game state after the end of the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), the time-saving game state (low-probability low-base state), and the probable changing game state (high-probability high-base state) are provided as a plurality of types of game states. One of a plurality of game states is set as an alternative. In addition, since each game state has already been described in detail, duplicate description will be omitted here.

  In addition, when the big hit game is executed, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the big hit game based on the big hit type (the type of the symbol group), and after the big hit game ends. Switch the variation pattern selection state. In the present embodiment, a normal selection state, a time-saving selection state, and a probable change selection state are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, and according to the determined game state, the big hit type, the number of times of display of the special symbol, and the like. Thus, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is set alternatively. Note that each variation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, and a duplicate description will be omitted here.

  Further, the game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and the fluctuation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the main information storage means 180 for command storage. Store in area.

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormal signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame open signal, and the like. It is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of the error state, the CPU requests the effect control board 200 for an effect control command (“error effect designating command”) including the error information in order to instruct the effect state effect. Although not shown in FIG. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is a detecting unit for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch is for detecting whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called illegal game action.

  The main information storage means 180 stores random number information acquired in the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game, operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the game state (probability changing function, variation time) related to the special symbol game and the ordinary symbol game. Information of the shortening function, the electric tuner support function), the information on the variation pattern selection state, the result information of the determination of the success or failure of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (big hit, miss), the stop symbol (including the symbol group) related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol Information, information on the fluctuation pattern (including the fluctuation addition pattern) of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, information on the jackpot game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (opening number per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, effect control Is configured to temporarily store information such as the command data includes a predetermined memory area for storing each information.

The command transmission / reception means 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Have been. Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. In order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, the Bit 7 of the MODE data is “1”. Bit 7 of the EVENT data is “0”. When transmitting such information as valid, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. The effect control command generated in each process is transmitted, in principle, one command every interrupt cycle in accordance with the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The effect control board 200 includes, as shown in FIG. 4, an effect lottery random number generating means 210, an effect generalizing means 220, a lamp control means 230, an accessory control means 240, an error effect control means 250, a sub main information storage means 260, a command Transmission / reception means 270. The above-described units in the effect control board 200 are configured by hardware such as a sub main CPU 201, a ROM 202, a RAM 203, and an electronic circuit arranged on the effect control board 200, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional representation of something.

  The production lottery random number generation means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (production lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As the software random numbers, a prefetch lottery random number used for a lottery of a prefetching effect, a decorative pattern random number used for a lottery of a stop pattern of a decorative pattern, a variable effect pattern random number used for a variable effect pattern of a decorative pattern, It includes a random number of an announcement lottery used for the lottery, a random number of a jackpot effect pattern used for a lottery of a jackpot effect pattern, a stage random number used for a shift lottery of an effect stage, and the like. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when no command analysis is performed in the effect control-side main processing described later (when no effect control command is received from the main control board 100). I do.

  The effect management means 220 includes an effect mode control means 221, a hold information display control means 222, a prefetch notice control means 223, a variable effect control means 224, a decorative symbol control means 225, a notice effect control means 226, and a special game effect control means 227. Including.

  The effect mode control means 221 determines the effect mode ("" based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100 and the like, in conformity with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side. Game effect mode ”). In the present embodiment, “normal effect mode”, “time saving effect mode”, and “probable change effect mode” are set as a plurality of effect modes, and a game state (or a variation pattern) managed on the main control board 100 side is set. Any one of a plurality of effect modes is selectively set according to the selected state), the number of times of display of the special symbol, and the like, and the variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the “normal effect mode” is set, and when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the “time saving effect mode” is set. In some cases, the “probable effect mode” is set. When any of the effect modes is set, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a background image that is a back display of a decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen as an effect (fluctuating effect) indicating that the user is staying in the effect mode. ) Is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. As described above, since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently in stay from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

The reserved information display control means 222 includes a first reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and a second reserved ball number counter for counting the number of activated balls of the second special symbol. Have. When receiving the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, the hold information display control means 222 updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of active balls included in this command. On the other hand, the hold information display control means 222 updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter when it receives the change start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is consumed. Further, the hold information display control means 222 displays the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol on the holding image display section 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first holding ball number counter and the second holding ball number counter. And the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol are displayed. In addition, the hold information display control unit 222 is configured to use the first special symbol or the second special symbol of the operation-holding ball (the earliest operation-holding ball) in the changing image display area 720 of the effect display device 70. Then, control is performed to display the changing image displayed by switching to the reserved image corresponding to the operation reserved ball. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as “reserved images” without distinction, and are referred to as the changing image of the first special symbol. There is a case where the moving image of the second special symbol is simply referred to as a "changing image" without being distinguished from the changing image.

  The look-ahead notice control means 223 performs a look-ahead determination (referred to as a "look-ahead lottery") on the operation-holding ball to be subjected to the look-ahead notice effect. The look-ahead announcement effect is a so-called continuous announcement effect in which the possibility of a jackpot winning or a high expectation effect (for example, a reach effect) is generated over one or more variable displays before the operation-holding ball to be pre-read is digested. It is generated as one embodiment. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-judgment result included in the pre-judgment command from the main control board 100. Here, upon receiving the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, the pre-reading advance control means 223 distinguishes the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, and respectively Up to a predetermined upper limit number (four), temporary storage is performed in the pre-reading information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in such a manner as to be combined with the order of entering operation-pending balls. The look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the hold storage area of the main control board 100. In the order of entering the starting ports 51 and 52, the hold 1 storage area (first hold storage area), A reserved 2 storage area (second reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided. Each hold storage area can store information on the result of the preliminary determination of the success / failure, the information of the result of the preliminary determination of the symbol, and the information of the result of the preliminary determination of the variation pattern as one set. The information of the pre-determination result is stored in the order of the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area, while the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 It is digested in the order of the storage areas (first in first out principle). When the information of the pre-determination result of the hold 1 storage area is digested, the information of the pre-determination result stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area is stored in the lower-numbered storage areas, respectively. At the same time, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

The fluctuation effect control unit 224 performs a fluctuation process (starting process) from the start to the stop in the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol based on the information (the fluctuation pattern information, the fluctuation additional information, and the like) included in the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100. ) Is determined by lottery. The variation effect control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern of a decorative symbol, and includes a variation pattern of a special symbol from the plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables. A fluctuation effect pattern table corresponding to (variation time) is selected. Here, on the main control board 100 side, a main fluctuation pattern (for example, “SP reach A” or “SP reach B”) of the special symbol is determined, while on the effect control board 200 side, based on the main fluctuation pattern. A sub-variation pattern (for example, “SP reach A1, A2,...,” Or “SP reach A2, A3,...”, Etc.) of the decorative design that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. In the decorative effect variation effect pattern, a variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, a scenario of a series of effect display processes from the start of the variation to the end of the variation of the decorative symbol is defined, and a notice is given at each stage in the display process. The timing at which the effect is generated is also defined as a time schedule. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the fluctuation start command of the same information is received), the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is different if the effect mode during stay is different. A variable effect pattern with different contents can be selected. That is, the variable effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during stay.

  Further, upon receiving the standby demonstration command from the main control board 100, the variation effect control unit 224 receives the standby demonstration command and then starts the variation display of the special symbol (the next variation start). During a customer waiting period (until a command is received), for example, a standby demonstration effect for reproducing a demonstration moving image (a customer waiting demonstration effect) is executed.

  The decoration symbol control means 225 decorates the decoration based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100 and the fluctuation effect pattern determined by the fluctuation effect control means 224. The final combination of symbols to be stopped (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. In this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are formed, and the decorative symbols are formed by identification elements made up of, for example, numbers. Further, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables which are referred to when determining a combination of decorative symbols of stop symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol patterns”) by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for a big hit, a stop symbol pattern table for a non-reach stop, and a stop symbol pattern table for a non-reach out. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, and includes a "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)" and a "stop symbol indicating a loss (losing symbol)". The big hit symbol indicating the specific big hit (probably variable big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same odd-numbered number are arranged (for example, “7.7.7”). A jackpot symbol indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same even number are aligned (for example, “2.2.2”). The missing symbol is a combination of stop modes (for example, “1.3.8”) in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol of a number different from other numbers. Here, the out-of-reach symbol among the out-of-reach symbols is a combination of stop modes (for example, “3.1.3”) in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth by several frames while the left symbol and the right symbol match. Become. In the case of a small hit symbol or a big hit symbol, such as a 2R big hit symbol, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3.5.7" may be used. In addition, when the lottery result is a non-reach loss, a specific result called a “chance eye” (for example, “1.2.3” or “5.6.7”, "2.2.3" or "5.5.6" may be selected as the gap. Further, in the above-described pseudo continuous effect, when an effect of displaying a temporary stop and re-variation display before final display of a final stop symbol is performed, a special symbol ( Pseudo pattern) is selected. In the case of displaying a temporary stop symbol indicating the occurrence of a pseudo ream, at least one stop symbol (typically a middle symbol) among the three rows of decorative symbols is displayed with characters such as "NEXT". There is a case where a special symbol (pseudo continuous symbol) is replaced and displayed (for example, “2 · NEXT · 3”). Note that a stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the following variable effect patterns. In the present embodiment, the symbols are stopped in the order of a left symbol, a right symbol, and a middle symbol in principle. However, when the fluctuation time is a fluctuation effect pattern of the shortened fluctuation set to be extremely short, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped almost at the same time. It is also possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, and in this case, the big hit expectation tends to be relatively high. Regardless of the stop order, it is desirable that the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol start to change at the same time when the change starts. However, also here, as a special fluctuation effect pattern, the fluctuation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol attributes of the decorative symbols in the present embodiment. The decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element consisting of a number and a color (display color) given to the identification element. In the present embodiment, nine types of numbers “1” to “9” are set as identification elements (that is, there are nine types of decorative patterns). The decorative symbols are arranged in the order of “1” to “9” according to the arrangement of the symbol columns, and are arranged in the order of “1” to “9” on the effect display device 70 (or the order of “9” to “1”). , A cyclic display or a scroll display is performed in each of the display areas Z1, Z2, and Z3. After "9", the display returns to "1" again (or returns to "9" again after "1"). . This specification is the same in other embodiments. For each decorative design, the design attribute is determined by the type of color given to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative symbols are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same symbol attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three colors of “blue”, “red”, and “gold” are set as the colors of the decorative pattern. In the drawings, the display modes of the three types of decorative patterns of “blue”, “red”, and “gold” are represented by “white”, “hatched”, and “filled”. Specifically, the decorative symbols “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” are classified into blue symbol attributes (blue attributes), and the decorative symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, “9” Is classified into a red symbol attribute (red attribute), and the decorative symbol "7" is classified into a gold symbol attribute (gold attribute). In the present embodiment, as the symbol attribute of the decorative symbol, the expectation of the payout acquisition and the expectation of the probable change transition are increased one by one in the order of “blue” <“red” <“gold”. In the following, for the sake of convenience, a decorative pattern with a blue attribute is also called a “blue pattern”, a decorative pattern with a red attribute is also called a “red pattern”, and a decorative pattern with a golden attribute is also called a “gold pattern”.

  The notice effect control means 226 draws a notice effect pattern defining the contents of the notice effect to be executed at each stage of the process of changing the decorative pattern in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern determined by the change effect control means 224. Determined by The announcement effect pattern includes an effect pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image or animation of a specific character, an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable character, and the like. The notice effect is executed in parallel with the change display of the decorative symbol, and indicates in advance that the symbol change stops in a big hit mode with a high jackpot reliability. The announcement effects include an announcement effect that is executed before the reach state occurs (including when a reach state occurs) in the decorative symbol change display process, and an announcement effect that is executed after the reach state occurs. Each of the announcement effects has a different jackpot reliability. Basically, the announcement effect displayed after the occurrence of the reach has a relatively higher expectation degree of the jackpot than the announcement effect displayed before the occurrence of the reach. Is getting higher. The announcement effect control means 226 holds an announcement lottery table, which is referred to when selecting an announcement effect pattern, for each type of announcement effect, and an announcement corresponding to the type of announcement effect that occurs along the scenario of the variable effect pattern. A lottery table is selected. In addition, as a kind of specific notice effect, for example, comment notice effect, background notice effect, SU (step-up) notice effect, logo notice effect, mini-character notice effect, group notice effect, character notice effect, etc. are prepared. ing. This announcement effect is basically performed by synthesizing one or a plurality of advance effect displays with the variation display of the decorative symbol on the effect display device 70. For this reason, even in the case of a variation display of a decorative symbol with the same variation effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or more notice effects.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the content of the big hit medium effect (big hit effect pattern) for notifying that a big hit game is being played. The jackpot medium effect includes a jackpot start demonstration effect notifying the start of the jackpot game, a round effect notifying that the round game is being performed, and a jackpot end demonstration effect notifying the end of the jackpot game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the jackpot start demonstration command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227, based on the jackpot type information stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, etc. , Round effect pattern, big hit end demonstration effect pattern). In the big hit effect pattern, a big hit start demonstration effect time, a round effect time (an effect time according to the opening pattern of the big winning port 54), and a big hit end demonstration effect time are set.
A series of production contents are set along the time axis. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the jackpot start demonstration effect in response to receiving the jackpot start demo command from the main control board 100 in accordance with the jackpot effect pattern, and in response to receiving the round effect designation command. Each round effect is executed, and the big hit end demonstration effect is executed when the big hit end demo command is received. In the big hit start demonstration effect, for example, a character of “big hit start” is displayed on the screen to notify the start of the big hit game. In the round effect, for example, the number of currently executed rounds and the number of acquired prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the big hit game are displayed. Then, in the big hit end demonstration effect, for example, a character of “big hit end” is displayed on the screen to notify the end of the big hit game, and thereafter, an effect indicating a game state (mode) to be shifted is displayed.

  As described above, the production control means 220 generates an image control command related to images and sounds based on the determined production contents (a look-ahead production pattern, a fluctuation production pattern, a notice production pattern, a stop design pattern, a big hit production pattern, etc.) This is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260.

  The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting and emission color of the effect lamp in accordance with the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling the lighting of the effect lamp LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80), and the lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. Is read, and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

  The accessory control means 240 controls the driving of each movable accessory 24 in accordance with the effect contents set by the effect generalizing means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for driving and controlling the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify that an error condition has occurred in the gaming machine according to the error effect pattern. I have.

  The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store information on decorative symbols, information on variable effect patterns, information on notice effect patterns, information on control commands, and the like. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing an effect control command from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing an image control command to the image control board 300, an image control board 300 ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

  The command transmission / reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260. The command transmission / reception means 270 generates an interruption based on the input of the above-described strobe signal from the main control board 100 and executes a reception interruption process of the effect control command (details will be described later). It is supposed to get. When the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the strobe signal, the command transmission / reception means 270 performs the reception interrupt processing of the effect control command with higher priority than other interrupt processing (interrupt processing with a priority level lower than 7 described later). ing.

In addition, the command transmitting / receiving means 270 stores in the sub main information storage means 260 to instruct execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative design information, etc.) set by the effect generalizing means 220. The transmitted image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. The image control command is transmitted at a predetermined cycle (500 μs in this example) in principle according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub main information storage unit 260. Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes the various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and variably displays the effect image including the decorative pattern on the effect display device 70 along the scenario of the variable effect pattern. At each stage of the variation display process, a notice effect is displayed in such a manner as to be superimposed on the effect of the symbol change. Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260.

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PA having such a configuration is configured such that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 in accordance with the progress of the game and the like. In the following, of the various game effects, the content of the mid-jackpot effect will be described. In the following, "restricting execution" or "restricting execution" means, for example, not executing all, not executing part, and relatively lowering the display or output priority. Is used as a concept including Also, in the following, “overlapping execution (overlapping execution)” means that one execution period (or execution timing) and the other execution period (or execution timing) overlap, and both execution periods (or execution timings) overlap. The concept includes a case in which the entire periods (or execution timings) overlap and a case in which both of the execution periods (or execution timings) overlap.

[Direction during big hit]
As described above, the jackpot medium effect includes a jackpot start demonstration effect, a round effect, and a jackpot end demonstration effect. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a big hit type (a type of a symbol group), a big hit symbol combination (a combination of decorative symbols when a big hit occurs), and a big hit medium effect pattern. (A) in the figure is referred to when the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the normal gaming state, and (B) in the figure is referred to when the gaming state at the time of the big hit is the time-saving gaming state or the probable changing gaming state. . As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the big hit symbol combination and the type of the big hit medium effect pattern are determined according to the big hit type (symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process. In the present embodiment, even if the jackpot types are the same, the type of the jackpot symbol combination and the type of the jackpot medium effect pattern can be different depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning.

  The big hit symbol combination is composed of a combination of stop modes "*, **, *" in which three decorative symbols of the same numeral (identification element) are arranged (*: decorative symbol of an arbitrary numeral). The jackpot symbol combination is “specific jackpot” such as “1.1.1”, “3.3.3”, “5.5.5”, “7.7.7”, “9.9.9”. The odd symbol combinations (red symbol combinations and gold symbol combinations) shown and "special jackpots" such as "2.2.2," "4.4.4," "6.6.6," and "8.8.8" "Or" ordinary jackpot ". That is, the odd symbol combination (gold symbol combination, red symbol combination) is a jackpot symbol combination that determines that the winning has been made to the “specific jackpot”, while the even symbol combination (blue symbol combination) is “specific jackpot” and “ It is an uncertain jackpot symbol combination in which jackpot type of “normal jackpot” is won.

The gold symbol combination is a big hit symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is “16 rounds” and that “specific big hit”, which is a trigger for shifting to the probability change game state, is won. In other words, the gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that definitely notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot) having the highest degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of jackpot types. It is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is one of “16 rounds” or “4 rounds” for the red symbol combination. It is a big hit symbol combination that informs. The blue symbol combination has been confirmed to have the actual number of rounds of "4 rounds", but whether it has won the "special big hit" that triggers the transition to the probable change gaming state, or This is a jackpot symbol combination that informs that it is uncertain whether or not a “normal jackpot” which is a transition trigger has been won. Here, even in the case of the blue symbol combination, the real round number may be "16 rounds" (that is, even if the real round number is "16 rounds", the blue symbol is It may be configured so that a combination can be selected), but it is preferable that the red symbol combination is more likely to have a substantial round number of “16 rounds”. In this case, as one of the "ki-hit hit productions" to be described later, a "ki-hit hit C effect" that is probable change promotion and round promotion may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, “super longevity big hit production”, “longevity big hit A direction”, “long life big hit B direction”, “ki big hit A direction”, “ki big hit B direction” are set as a plurality of types of big hit middle production patterns. Have been. The super longevity special effect is a large hit medium effect pattern type that is set in correspondence with the big hit symbol combination being “gold symbol combination”. The big hit A effect and the big hit B effect are big hit medium effect pattern types that are set corresponding to the big hit symbol combination being “red symbol combination”. The big jackpot effect A and the big jackpot B effect are big hit medium rendering pattern types that are set corresponding to the big hit symbol combination being “blue symbol combination”. In other words, the big hit effect pattern type is set according to the symbol attributes (gold symbols, red symbols, and blue symbols) of the big hit symbol combination.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 11 (A), the big hit symbol combination and the big hit medium effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning is the normal gaming state will be described. First, when the first special symbol “4R specific jackpot” is won, “red symbol combination” or “blue symbol combination” is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the big hit symbol combination, a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, if “red symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination, “jutsu big hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding big hit middle production pattern, and “blue symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination. In such a case, the "big hit B effect" is selected as the corresponding big hit effect pattern. When the first special symbol “4R normal big hit” is won, “blue symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol, and “Kiyo Big Hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol “16R specific big hit” is won, “gold symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol, and “super long hit big hit” is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. Also, when the second special symbol “4R specific big hit” is won, “red symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination, and “longevity big hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R normal big hit" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol, and "Kiyo Big Hit A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11 (B), a description will be given of a jackpot symbol combination and a jackpot medium effect pattern selected when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the time-saving gaming state or the probable changing gaming state. When the first special symbol “4R specific big hit” is won, “red symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination, and “jutsu big hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the first special symbol "4R normal big hit" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol combination, and "big hit A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol “16R specific big hit” is won, “gold symbol combination” or “red symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination. For example, as the big hit symbol combination, a gold symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when "gold symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol combination, "super longevity big hit effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern, and "red symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol combination. In such a case, the “longevity big hit B effect” is selected as the corresponding big hit medium effect pattern. When the second special symbol “4R specific big hit” is won, “red symbol combination” or “blue symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination. For example, as the big hit symbol combination, a red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and a blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, if “red symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination, “jutsu big hit A effect” is selected as the corresponding big hit middle production pattern, and “blue symbol combination” is selected as the big hit symbol combination. In such a case, the "big hit B effect" is selected as the corresponding big hit effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R normal big hit" is won, "blue symbol combination" is selected as the big hit symbol, and "Kiyo Big Hit A effect" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium effect pattern.

  The super longevity jackpot effect is a jackpot effect pattern that definitely notifies that the player has won the most advantageous jackpot (16R specific jackpot) having the highest degree of advantage for the player among the plurality of jackpot types.

  It has been determined that the “Big Jackpot A” and “Big Jackpot” B effects have been won in the “specific jackpot” type that triggers the transition to the probable change game state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (fourth round) is reached. Is a big hit medium-draft production pattern in which the production progresses while it is uncertain whether the actual round number is any of “16 rounds” or “4 rounds”. Here, even if the A hit production has reached the predetermined number of rounds (fourth round), the promotion effect (round promotion effect) is not performed, and the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is “4 rounds”. It is determined that there is. On the other hand, in the longevity hit B production, when the predetermined number of rounds (the fourth round) is reached, a promotion effect (round promotion effect) occurs, and the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is “16 rounds”. (The specified round number has been promoted to “16 rounds”).

  It is confirmed that the number of real rounds for the big hit A and the big hit B is "4 rounds". However, until the big hit end demonstration is reached, the "special big hit" which is a trigger for shifting to the probable change game state It is a big hit medium-draft production pattern in which the performance progresses as it is uncertain whether the game has been won or a “normal big hit” which is a trigger for shifting to the time-saving gaming state. Here, even if the big hit A production reaches the big hit end demonstration, no promotion effect (probable change promotion effect) is performed, and the current big hit type is "normal big hit" (the time reduction after the current big hit game ends). (Transition to gaming state) is determined. On the other hand, when the big hit B production reaches the big hit end demonstration, a promotion effect (probable change promotion effect) occurs, and the current big hit type is "specific big hit" (after the current big hit game ends, the positive change game state). Is determined). Further, in FIG. 11, the correspondence between the jackpot type and the jackpot medium effect pattern is made different according to the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning. However, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, as shown in FIG. It may be a correspondence. Also, a 16R specific jackpot may be provided in the first special symbol, in which case, even at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, a super longevity jackpot effect or a longevity jackpot B effect may be executed. The detailed contents of the promotion effects (round promotion effects, probable change promotion effects) will be described later.

Next, the content of each large hit medium effect pattern will be described. FIG. 12 to FIG. 16 are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the big hit middle production effect pattern. In the drawing, the correspondence between the type of the individual effect that occurs during the big hit game and the occurrence timing is determined for each of the big hit medium effect patterns. In addition, in the figure, the opening mode of the special winning opening 54 is additionally described for easy understanding of the description. However, in the present embodiment, as an opening mode of the special winning opening 54, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is set to the opening time in which a game ball having a specified count (full count) can enter or can easily enter. Only the set “Long Open” is prepared, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a game ball whose opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 is a prescribed count (full count) is entered. A “short opening” set to an opening time that is impossible or difficult to enter the ball may be prepared.

  First, during the execution of the big hit start demonstration, a screen indicating the type of the big hit middle production (super longevity production, longevity big hit production, happy big hit production) is displayed, and any big hit middle production is started for the player. Is suggested. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the big hit start demonstration is set to “5 seconds” in common for all big hits.

  During the execution of each round game, a round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the big hit middle production (super longevity production, longevity production, happy big production). That is, when the big hit middle production pattern is a super longevity big hit production, a super longevity big hit round screen, and when it is a long life big hit A effect A or a long life big hit B production, a longevity big hit round screen, a big hit big A effect or a big hit big B If it is an effect, a big hit round screen is displayed. However, when a round promotion effect described later occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of the medium-size jackpot effect is promoted, and the mode is switched from a low-rank type round effect screen to a high-rank type round effect screen. It has become.

  After the end of each round game, an interval that is a pause time (closing time of the special winning opening 54) from the end of each round game to the start of setting of the next round game or big hit end demonstration. A period has been set. Therefore, the special game is "big hit start demonstration" → "round game" → "interval period" → "round game" → "interval period" → ... → "round game" → "interval period" → "big hit end demo" It is developed in such a flow. In the present embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to “2 seconds” in common for all jackpots. Details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the big hit end demonstration, the contents of the effect mode (game state) to be shifted after the currently running big hit game is suggested, and to the player, which effect mode is to be entered or continued. Is done. Also, during the big hit end demonstration period, there is a case where a later-described probable change promotion effect or a held continuous suggestion effect is performed. In addition, the hold consecutive suggestion effect performed during the big hit end demonstration period includes a hold consecutive suggestion effect (an over-winning effect or an optional bonus prize effect, which is performed when an over-winning or bonus win occurs in a modified example described later). Combined production) is not included. In other words, the pending consecutive suggestion effect according to a modified example described later is not an effect performed during the big hit end demonstration period, but an effect performed during the interval period. The details of the probable change promotion effect and the pending consecutive suggestion effect of the present embodiment will be described later. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is set to “20 seconds” for all the big hits. As described above, the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration are either the jackpot game at the time of the initial hit (that is, the jackpot from the low-probability low-base state) or the jackpot game (the high-probability Each demo time may be configured differently depending on whether it is a high base state or a low probability high base state big hit. Specifically, in the case of a jackpot game during a series of casinos, the processing of the game before and after the jackpot is performed more quickly than in the case of a jackpot game at the time of the first hit (the game during the series of casinos is quickly performed). For the sake of proceeding), each demonstration time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as described above, when performing an effect to warn about forgetting to take a prepaid card in a big hit game at the time of the first hit, it is preferable to perform it within a big hit end demonstration period set relatively long. Yes, when performing a performance that warns about forgetting to take a prepaid card during a jackpot game during a series of holidays, it may be performed during the round game execution period rather than the relatively short set jackpot end demonstration period It is suitable. In addition, with respect to the hold consecutive suggestion effect, it is preferable that in the big hit game at the time of the first hit (that is, the big hit from the low probability low base state), even if there is a big hit hold in the hold, it is not executed or the execution probability is lowered. There is a jackpot game in the extended house (that is, a jackpot from the high probability high base state or the low probability high base state), it is preferable not to execute the jackpot even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold or to increase the execution probability. . Further, it is preferable that the hold consecutive suggestion effect is performed during execution of the special game corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot, and is executed when the jackpot hold in the hold is the jackpot hold corresponding to the 16R specific jackpot. (That is, the jackpot holding in the holding which is the trigger of executing the jackpot in which the holding consecutive suggestion effect is displayed and the holding consecutive suggestion effect is applied only to the 16R specific jackpot, and the 4R specific / normal jackpot It is preferable to avoid such a situation).

  Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen (round effect screen) during a round game. Although not shown, in the central area of the screen, various images (animation images, etc.) corresponding to the type of the medium-size jackpot effect pattern are displayed in order to excite the big hit game.

  In the round display area 730 of the screen, the number of rounds (the third round in the illustrated example) indicating the number of the round game currently being executed is displayed. For example, if the currently executed round game is the first round game (first round), “ROUND1” is displayed in the round display area, and the currently executed round game is changed to the second round game (second round game). In the case of (round), “ROUND2” is displayed in the round display area, and even thereafter, every time a round game is played, “ROUND3”, “ROUND4”... Are displayed in the round display area.

In the right strike display area 731 of the screen, a right strike image (also referred to as a launch instruction effect) for urging the player to fire the game ball toward the right area PA2 (right strike) is displayed. On the other hand, in spite of the situation where a right hit should be made (during a big hit), on the contrary, when the game ball flows down the left area PA1 and enters the general winning openings 61 to 63, or the first start-up. When the ball enters the mouth 51, that is, when a game ball is fired toward the left area PA1, an effect (advisory notification effect) that calls attention to prevent the player from hitting the left side is executed. It may be. In the warning notification effect, a message instructing right-handing is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP is turned on in a special light emission mode (for example, high-luminance, high-speed, or instantaneously blinks), thereby causing the game ball to play. The player is notified that the shot should be fired toward the right area PA2 (right strike). In addition, as the warning notification effect, for example, a sound of “Please right-click” (right-hand instruction sound) may be output from the speaker 11. It is desirable that the warning notification effect be a prominent position (for example, a central display area) or a size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that the player can clearly recognize the warning effect. , A right-hit image, a display content in the prize-ball acquisition display area 732, a display content in the accumulated prize-ball count display area 733, an enhanced effect, and a display content in the round display area 730, It is preferable to configure so as to be displayed. However, since the right-handed image is also information that should be clearly conveyed to the player (information on an appropriate launch position), the right-handed image and the warning notification effect may be displayed in different display areas so as not to be superimposed. Is appropriate. On the other hand, the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732, the display contents in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733, the highlight effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730, which will be described later, do not impair the visibility of the warning notification effect. It is desirable that the display priority is also high (that is, while the display can be superimposed, the warning notification effect is displayed on the front in that case). This launch instruction production is displayed as a display condition when the ball enters the general winning opening 61 to 63 during a big hit or when the ball enters the first starting port 51, but the display time is set to 10 seconds. Have been. However, if the display condition is satisfied again before the display time of 10 seconds elapses, 10 seconds is set as the display time again (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, for the right-hit image and the alert notification effect, it is preferable to display not only during the big hit but also in a high-base state such as a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state. If the display is continued over the high base state and the warning notification is displayed less than 10 seconds before the end of the big hit (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the big hit demonstration)
Is desirably configured to be continuously displayed from the middle of a big hit to the high base state.

  In the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a predetermined prize (over prize or bonus prize described later) occurs, the number of prize balls provided based on the prize is provided to notify that the prize has occurred. (Unit prize balls) is displayed. The prize ball acquisition display area 732 displays the number of prize balls to be acquired by the over prize when an over prize occurs (the number of unit prize balls to be acquired when one game ball is prize in the large winning opening 54). The first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the number of prize balls to be acquired by a bonus prize when a bonus prize is generated (the number of unit prize balls to be acquired when one game ball is awarded to the general winning opening 64). And a second prize ball acquisition display area 732B to be displayed. For example, if an over-winning occurs, “+15 pt” corresponding to the number of unit prize balls (15) of the special winning opening 54 is displayed, and if a bonus win occurs, a unit winning of the general winning opening 64 is displayed. “+ 3pt” corresponding to the number of balls (three) is displayed. As a modification, the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B may be separated from each other.

  The accumulated prize ball number display area 733 on the screen displays the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired up to the present time based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the big hit game in the retreat. "Accumulated prize balls" is displayed. The “rensou” is a state in which the specific game state is continued without returning to the non-specific game state after the occurrence of the first hit which triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (in the specific game state). Is a state in which the big hit occurs continuously). The “specific game state” is a game state in which the transition probability to the special game is higher than the normal game state (low-probability low-base state). This is a state in which at least one of the shortening function and the electric tuner support function is activated (at least one of a high probability high base state, a low probability high base state, and a high probability low base state). In the present embodiment, at least the game state (high base state) in which the electric chew support function is operating corresponds to the “specific game state”. The cumulative number of prize balls includes the number of prize balls obtained by entering game balls into the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. The cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by over-winning, which will be described later, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by over-winning. In addition, the number of accumulated prize balls may include the number of prize balls awarded by a bonus prize described below, or may not include the number of prize balls awarded by a bonus prize. . The over-winning prize production described later is executed only during the big hit (it can be executed because the big winning opening 54 can be opened and the ball can be entered). It is possible to enter regardless of whether or not there is. However, the bonus prize production effect described later is also configured to be executed only during the big hit. With respect to the bonus prize, the bonus prize production is executed when the big hit is in progress, but in the low-probability, low-base state, the special prize different from the bonus prize (for example, “Don't enter here now!” A special effect in which a display and a sound are generated, but may be generated when three balls are entered within a predetermined time (eg, within 5 seconds) instead of one, is executed, and a high probability is high. In the base state or the low-probability high base state, neither the bonus prize production nor the special production is performed (in this case, nothing needs to be performed, but as another production, a red flame is displayed around the frame of the production display device 70). May be performed for such a degree that the moment occurs.)

  In addition, in addition to this accumulated prize ball number, or in place of the accumulated prize ball number, based on a game ball entering the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in one currently executing big hit game. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired up to the present time (referred to as “the number of middle prize balls”) may be displayed. The big hit prize ball number is the number of prize balls actually obtained by the player during the execution of one big hit game. Therefore, basically, the number of obtainable prize balls set according to the big hit type ( (Theoretical expected number of prize balls), but does not exceed the number of obtainable prize balls. However, when an over-winning prize described later occurs, the number of middle prize balls in the big hit may exceed the number of obtainable prize balls (theoretical expected number of prize balls) set according to the big hit type.

  Although not shown, the number of consecutive big hits in the specific gaming state, or the number of consecutive holidays, which is the number of times including the initial hit (the number of additions of one), is displayed during the series. Is also good. As an example, when a big hit is made three times in the specific game state after the first hit, a display such as "third consecutive row" or "fourth consecutive row" may be displayed during the big hit. In each round of the special game, a pseudo decorative symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “pseudo decorative symbol”) may be changed and displayed (temporary stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that the pseudo-decorative symbol is a symbol mode (a symbol dedicated to a big hit) that is different from a normal decorative symbol that is variably displayed during a non-special game. More specifically, if the decorative pattern that is fluctuated and displayed during a non-special game is made up of a pattern (character) and a number, the special pattern is a decorative pattern consisting only of numbers and its size is reduced. Alternatively, if the decorative symbol that is variably displayed during the non-special game is composed only of numbers, the decorative symbol is the same numeral only during the special game, but its size is reduced. Furthermore, when the big eyes such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned at the time of the big hit, "7, 7, 7" is displayed during the special game because it is only necessary to recognize which decorative pattern has hit the big hit. However, it is sufficient that only “7” (only one decorative symbol, not a decorative symbol combination of three decorative symbols) is displayed. During the execution of the big hit game (round game), a “prize-related effect”, which is a characteristic effect of the present embodiment, is executed.

[Winning-related effects]
Next, the winning-related effects of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effects of the present embodiment. The winning-related effect is an effect that is executed based on the fact that a game ball has entered a specific winning opening (the big winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64) during execution of the big hit game. The winning-related effects include (A) a special winning opening winning effect and (B) a general winning opening winning effect.

<A. Grand Prize Winning Prize Production>
The special winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when a game ball wins the special winning opening 54 during execution of a special game. The special winning opening winning effects include a special winning opening normal winning effect, a special winning opening over winning effect, and a special winning opening count-up effect. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, (a) a game ball will win in the special winning opening 54, (a) a game ball will enter the special winning opening 54, and (c) a game ball will The detection by the special winning opening switch 541 and the reception of the special winning opening command from the main control board 100 are used in the same meaning.

{A-1. Large Winning Ordinary Winning Direction Direction≫
The special winning opening normal winning effect is an effect of notifying that the game ball has won the special winning opening 54 for the winning of the game ball within the specified count number to the special winning opening 54. In other words, the special winning opening normal winning effect is performed each time a game ball wins the special winning opening 54 until the number of winning of the game balls to the special winning opening 54 in one round game reaches the specified count. Become a director. In the present embodiment, a specific example of the special winning opening normal winning effect is not particularly specified, but at least one of a plurality of effect means such as the effect display device 70, the speaker 11, the effect lamp LP, and the movable role 24 is used. There was a regular winning prize production. As an example, (1) an object corresponding to a specified count number in one unit game is displayed (for example, a treasure box display is displayed in a single unit game for the specified count number), and a game is played to the special winning opening 54. An effect on the effect display device 70 in which the object is deleted each time the ball enters, and (2) a speaker that outputs a sound of “charin” each time a game ball enters the special winning opening 54. 11, and (3) an effect with an effect lamp LP in which a lamp flashes twice each time a game ball enters the special winning opening 54. In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, without providing a special winning opening normal winning effect, only a special winning opening count-up effect described later is performed for the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 54 up to the specified count number. It may be configured to be performed.

{A-2. Large winning opening
The winning prize over-winning effect (also referred to as “over winning prize effect”) is a game ball placed in the special prize opening 54 for a prize (over winning) of a game ball exceeding a specified count to the special winning opening 54. This is an effect that suggests or informs that a prize has been won. “Over winning” means that a game ball exceeding the specified count (in this embodiment, the eleventh or later game ball) is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 during the execution of one round game. Say. In the present embodiment, as will be described later in detail, the valid detection period of the special winning opening switch 541 is a detection grace period after each round game ends (in this embodiment, the same period as the interval period, The grace period may be a different period, for example, a standby time set between each round game or between the last round game and the big hit end demonstration, and is closed from the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54. If the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time), which is the period during which the game is maintained, or the interval period, which is the end demonstration waiting time, is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period will be between each round game or the last round This is a period set between the game and the big hit end demonstration, in which the game balls enter after the big winning opening 54 starts the closing operation (exceeding the specified count number). The detection grace period, which is a period in which game balls can be detected, is set to one second after the opening of the special winning opening 54 while the interval period at least partially overlaps with the interval period. May be set, or may be set to 3 seconds), and an over-winning prize may occur during this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of the over-winning, when the game ball of the 10th count enters the special winning opening 54 and is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, the closing operation of the special winning opening 54 is started. If the subsequent game ball (the game ball after the 11th count) has entered the big winning hole 54 before the winning opening 54 is closed, the subsequent game ball (the game after the 11th count) When the ball (ball) is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period), an over-winning occurs.

  The types of the over-prize-winning effects include an over-win-win image display effect and an over-win-win sound output effect. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of an effect of an over-winning prize effect of the present embodiment. In addition, it is preferable that the effect form of the over-winning effect is different from the effect mode of the above-described large winning opening normal winning effect. Further, as a modification, as an effect relating to an over-winning prize, only an over-winning image may be mounted (no over-winning sound is mounted), or only an over-winning sound may be mounted (no over-winning image is mounted).

  The over-winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (called “over-winning image”) indicating that an over-winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-winning image of the character “+15 pt” is displayed as an over-winning image in the award winning display area 732 of the screen, and “15” are displayed based on the occurrence of over-winning. It is suggested that the prize ball was obtained. Thereby, the player can intuitively understand that the over-winning has occurred.

  The over-winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting from the speaker 11 a sound indicating that an over-winning sound has occurred (“over-winning sound”). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the sound effect (voice of the character) of “yes” is output from the speaker 11, indicating that an over-winning has occurred.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for an over-winning prize effect may be provided. That is, a plurality of types of over-winning images or a plurality of types of over-winning sounds may be prepared, and any of the over-winning images and over-winning sounds may be selected by a production lottery when an over-winning occurs. Good. In this case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or the over-winning sound, a suggestion of a hold sequence, a suggestion of a probable change, or a suggestion of the number of rounds may be performed. As an example, there is only one type of over-winning image of “+15 pt”, while the over-winning sound includes “good”, “good tone”, and “congratulations” in addition to “yes”. In particular, when the over-winning sound of “congratulations” occurs, (1) the effect also serves as a suggestion of a pending repetition, and (2) a role also suggests that the currently executed big hit is a probable variable big hit. (3) The jackpot that is currently being executed may also serve to indicate that the jackpot is a 16R jackpot instead of a 4R jackpot.

  More specifically, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of over-winning, a held in-house is generated according to the type of over-winning sound. A configuration that suggests the possibility of a winning combination may be adopted (that is, the over-winning prize production and the pending consecutive prize production are also used). Here, the “holding in-house” refers to the preceding operation-holding ball when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination performed by digesting a certain preceding operation-holding ball is a big hit. It is expected that a jackpot will be formed in one or more subsequent operation-holding balls existing at a predetermined timing between the time when the special symbol determination is permitted and the end of the special game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity. The operation reserve ball (also referred to as “big hit reserve”) is included. In the present modified example, an over-winning sound A (a voice of “yes”) and an over-winning sound B (a voice of “congratulations”) are prepared as a plurality of types of over-winning sounds. If there is no jackpot at the time of occurrence of the over prize (if the hold in-house is not established), the selection rate of the over prize sound A is “100%” and the select rate of the over prize sound B is “0%”. ". On the other hand, when the jackpot is held at the time of occurrence of the over-winning (when the hold-in-house is established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is “0%”, and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is “100%”. ". In other words, the over-winning sound A is a sound in a normal mode indicating that an over-winning has occurred and that the reserved in-house has not been established. The over-winning sound B is a sound in a special mode that indicates that an over-winning has occurred and that the reserved in-house has been established. The selection rate of the over-winning sounds A and B may be set as appropriate. For example, when a jackpot is held when an over-winning occurs (when a hold-in-house is established), the over-winning sound A is selected. May be set to "80%", and the selectivity of the over-winning sound B may be set to "20%". Further, in the above-described modified example, the case where the hold consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the over-winning sound output effect is described as an example, but the hold consecutive suggestion effect may be applied to the over-winning image display effect (for example, over winning) When “+15 pt” is displayed in black characters as the image display effect, the reserved in-house is not established or is unlikely to be established. The specifications may or may not be established.) In addition, in the above-described modified example, the over-winning sound B as the holding consecutive suggestion has been described. However, the over-winning sound B may have a role of suggesting a certainty change suggestion or a round number suggestion. The selectivity of the over-winning sounds A and B depends on whether the jackpot that is set is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot). , The selectivity of the over-winning sound B is “0%”, while the selectivity of the over-winning sound A is “0%” and the selectivity of the over-winning sound B is “100” in the case of a specific big hit (probable variable hit). %, Or the selectivity of the over-winning sound A may be set to "80%", and the selectivity of the over-winning sound B may be set to "20%". Whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot is performed. In the case of the 4R jackpot, the selectivity of the over-winning sound A is "100%", the selectivity of the over-winning sound B is "0%", and the selectivity of the over-winning sound B is "0%". In the case of a big hit, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is “0%”, the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is “100%”, or the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is “80%”, and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is The selectivity may be “20%”.

Further, in the present embodiment, the “special figure 2 priority digestion method” is adopted, in which the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation-holding ball, only the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol may be used. Also, when the gaming state at the time of occurrence of the big hit which is the trigger for executing the special game is the specific gaming state (high base state) and the gaming state after the end of the special game is also the specific gaming state (high base state). Alternatively, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be executed in response to an over-winning prize generated during the execution of the special game. Also, on the premise that the preceding operation-holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), the specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included in the subsequent operation holding ball as the earliest specific hold. In addition, a hold consecutive suggestion effect may be executed in response to an over-winning prize generated during the execution of the special game. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold (or the first jackpot hold if there is more than one jackpot hold) is a low profit jackpot, It may be configured not to execute the sho suggestive effect. In other words, when the hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definitive to perform the hold-in consecutive play at the high profit big hit (16R big hit).

  Further, as a modified example of the present embodiment, an over-winning effect may indicate that an over-winning prize has occurred, and that there is a possibility that the over-winning prize has been won. In other words, the over-winning prize production and the probable change production may also be used. The probable change suggestion effect is an effect that indicates that the type of the jackpot that has triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probably variable hit), that is, that the game shifts to the probability change game state after the end of the special game. It is. In the present modification, for example, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds A to C are set, and when the type of jackpot that has been won this time is a normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is “70%” and the over-winning sound is The selectivity of B is “30%”, and the selectivity of over-winning sound C is “0%”. When the type of the jackpot that has been won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is “10%”, the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is “30%”, and the selection rate of the over-winning sound C is "60%". In other words, the probability of expected change (the expected degree of transition to the game-changing game state) increases by one step in the order of “over winning sound A” <“over winning sound B” <“over winning sound C”. In addition, as a further modified example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of electric support provided after the end of the special game is indicated instead of the degree of expected change due to the over-winning sound.

{A-3. Large winning opening count-up effect ≫
The special winning opening count-up effect is based on the value of the cumulative winning number of balls displayed in the cumulative winning number of balls display area 733 when a game ball enters the special winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game during the consecutive play. This is an effect of adding and displaying the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the special winning opening. In the present embodiment, the specification is such that “15” prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the special winning opening 54 (the number of unit prize balls of the special winning opening 54 is 15). When a ball enters the special winning opening 54, the value of the cumulative prize ball displayed in the cumulative prize ball display area 733 is updated in units of "15". Further, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball number counter for counting the cumulative prize ball number, and each time a game ball enters the special winning opening 54 (from the main control board 100). Each time a special winning opening winning command is received), "15", which is the unit winning number of the special winning opening 54, is added to the count value of the cumulative winning number of balls counter. A special winning opening count-up effect in which "15" is added to the displayed value of the accumulated prize balls is performed. This special winning opening count-up effect is performed regardless of whether a game ball enters the special winning opening 54 within the specified count number or exceeds the specified count number. It is.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of consecutive winning prize opening count-up effects. As shown in FIG. 20, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 54, the cumulative winning prize ball displayed in the cumulative winning prize ball display area 733, This is an effect in which the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls into the special winning opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up format by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of award balls is counted up one by one, such as “7000” → “7001” →... → “7014” → “7015”. FIG. 20 shows the flow of a special winning opening count-up effect when an over-winning occurs, and after the over-winning effect is performed in (A) in the diagram, (B) to (B) in the diagram. A special winning opening count-up effect is performed in E). In FIG. 20, the special winning opening count-up effect when the over-winning effect is performed is shown. Is made. In addition, a special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the entry of a game ball within the specified count number (especially a special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the tenth count which is the specified count number) is being performed. If an over-winning occurs when the count-up for the count of 15 balls has not yet been completed, the count-up of the special winning opening count-up effect for which the count-up for the 15 balls has not yet been completed has been completed. It is desirable that the configuration is such that the special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is started after the counting (after the count of 15 balls is performed). Here, if the over-winning is detected immediately before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the large winning opening count-up effect itself corresponding to the over-winning is started in the next round (after the elapse of the interval period). Although it overlaps with the execution period of the next round), a special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning performed during the execution of the next round (the next round started after the elapse of the interval period). Even if there is a ball in the special winning opening 54 during execution, the timing of the entering ball is in the middle of the special winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning, and the count-up for 15 balls is still completed. If not, when the count-up of the special winning opening count-up effect has not been completed yet, 5 balls of the count is performed), it is configured such that winning opening incremented effect corresponding to the winning of the big winning opening 54 in the next round is started is desirable.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs during the execution of the special game, the over-winning effect is executed, and the number of award balls awarded based on the over-winning is added to the cumulative number of award balls. You may comprise so that addition display may not be carried out. In other words, the cumulative prize ball count includes the number of prize balls awarded based on the entry of game balls within the specified count to the special winning opening 54 as a target for addition display, and the specified count to the special winning opening 54 is It may be configured such that the number of award balls awarded based on the entry of excess game balls is not subject to addition display.

  As a modification of the present embodiment, the specified count is exceeded during execution of a special game that is performed when an initial hit occurs (the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination in the normal game state is a big hit). Even if an over-winning prize occurs, an over-winning effect may not be executed. The special game includes high profit special game (for example, 16R special game) and low profit special game (for example, 4R special game). An over-winning effect may be executed when a winning occurs, and the over-winning effect may not be executed during execution of the low profit special game even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs. Also, as a type of round game, a long open round game in which a maximum open time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an open time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. And a short open round game in which the maximum open time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an open time (for example, 2 seconds) in which game balls having a specified count (full count) can enter or are easy to enter. During the open round game, an over-winning effect occurs when an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs, and even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs during the short open round game, An over-prize effect may not be executed. Also, during the execution of a special game performed when a specific jackpot (probably variable jackpot) is won, an over-winning effect is executed by the occurrence of an over-winning prize exceeding a prescribed count, and a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is performed. During the execution of the special game performed when the winning is made, the over-winning effect may not be executed even if an over-winning that exceeds the specified count occurs.

<B. General prize mouth winning direction>
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when a game ball wins the general winning opening 64. The general winning opening winning effect includes a general winning opening normal winning effect and a general winning opening count-up effect.

{B-1. General Winning Ordinary Winning Direction≫
The general winning opening normal winning effect (also referred to as “additional winning effect”) is an effect that indicates or informs that the game ball has won the general winning opening 64. In the following, the fact that a game ball wins in the general winning opening 64 during the execution of a special game is also referred to as an “additional prize”. The mouth 64 may be awarded, or may be referred to as a “bonus award”.

  There are two types of bonus prize production effects: bonus prize image display production and bonus prize sound output production. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a bonus prize winning effect of the present embodiment. Further, as a modification, as an effect relating to an extra bonus prize, an extra bonus prize image may be mounted (no extra bonus prize sound), or only an extra bonus prize sound may be installed (non extra bonus prize image). The bonus prize production is performed even during the execution of the round game or during the closing of the special winning opening 54 during the big hit (during the interval period). If the special winning opening 54 is closed (during the interval period), it can be executed simultaneously with the over winning effect.

  The bonus prize image display effect is an effect of displaying an image indicating that a bonus prize has occurred (referred to as an “addition prize image”). In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, in the prize sphere acquisition display area 732 of the screen, a bonus prize image of the character “+3 pt” is displayed as a bonus prize image, and based on the occurrence of the bonus prize, “3” It is suggested that the prize ball was obtained. Thereby, the player can intuitively understand that the bonus prize has occurred.

  The bonus prize sound output effect is an effect in which a sound (“addition prize sound”) indicating that a bonus prize has occurred is output from the speaker 11. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the sound effect of “picon” is output from the speaker 11, indicating that a bonus prize has occurred.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for a bonus winning effect may be provided. That is, a plurality of types of bonus prize images or a plurality of types of bonus prize sounds may be prepared, and any of the bonus prize images and the bonus prize sounds may be selected by an effect lottery when a bonus prize occurs. Good. In this case, depending on the type of the bonus prize winning image or the bonus prize winning sound, a suggestion of a continuous repetition, a suggestion of a probable change, or a suggestion of the number of rounds may be performed. As an example, while there is only one kind of bonus prize image of “+3 pt”, the bonus prize sound includes “Gachan”, “Chin”, and “Dokan” in addition to “Picon”. (1) the effect also serves as a suggestion of a pending repetition, (2) also plays a role of suggesting that the currently executed big hit is a probable big hit, (3) ) It may also serve as a suggestion that the currently executed jackpot is a 16R jackpot instead of a 4R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of bonus prize sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of bonus prizes, a reserved in-house is generated according to the type of bonus prize sound. A configuration that suggests the possibility that the game may be performed may be adopted (that is, the bonus prize production effect and the continuous rendition production effect are also used). In the present modification, a bonus prize sound A (effect sound called "picon") and a bonus prize sound B (effect sound "dokan") are prepared as a plurality of types of bonus prize sounds. If there is no jackpot at the time of occurrence of the bonus prize (if the hold in-house is not established), the selectivity of the bonus prize sound A is “100%” and the selectivity of the bonus prize sound B is “0%”. ". On the other hand, if a jackpot hold exists at the time of occurrence of a bonus prize (when a hold-in-condominium is established), the selectivity of the bonus prize sound A is “0%” and the selectivity of the bonus prize sound B is “100%”. ". In other words, the bonus prize sound A is a voice in a normal mode indicating that a bonus prize has occurred and that the reserved in-house has not been established. The bonus prize sound B is a sound in a special mode indicating that a bonus prize has occurred and that the hold-in-house has been established. Also, if a jackpot hold exists when a bonus prize is generated (when a hold in-house is established), the selectivity of the bonus prize sound A is “80%”, and the selectivity of the bonus prize sound B is “20%”. ". Note that, in the modified example, the description has been given by exemplifying a case in which the hold consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the bonus winning prize sound output effect. However, the reserve continuous suggestion effect may be applied to the bonus win image display effect (for example, the bonus win image). When “+ 3pt” is displayed in black characters as the display effect, the reserved in-house is not established or is unlikely to be established. May be satisfied or a specification that is highly likely to be satisfied). In addition, in the above-described modified example, the bonus winning sound B as the holding continuous suggestion has been described. However, the bonus winning sound B may have a function of suggesting a certainty change suggestion or a round number suggestion. The selectivity of the bonus prize-winning sounds A and B depends on whether the jackpot that is set is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot). , And the selectivity of the bonus prize sound B is “0%”, while the selectivity of the bonus prize sound A is “0%” and the selectivity of the bonus prize sound B is “100” in the case of the specific big hit (probable change big hit). % ", Or the selectivity of the bonus prize sound A may be" 80% "and the selectivity of the bonus prize sound B may be" 20% ", depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Depending on the bonus When the selection rate of the prize sounds A and B is 4R big hit, the selectivity of the bonus prize sound A is “100%”, and the selectivity of the bonus prize sound B is “0%”. The selection rate of the winning prize sound A is “0%”, the selection rate of the bonus prize sound B is “100%”, or the selection rate of the bonus prize sound A is “80%”, and the selection rate of the bonus prize sound B is “20”. % ".

  Further, in the present embodiment, the “special figure 2 priority digestion method” is adopted, in which the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol. As the target operation-holding ball, only the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol may be used. Also, when the gaming state at the time of occurrence of the big hit which is the trigger for executing the special game is the specific gaming state (high base state) and the gaming state after the end of the special game is also the specific gaming state (high base state). Alternatively, a holding consecutive suggestion effect may be executed in response to a bonus prize generated during the execution of the special game. Also, on the premise that the preceding operation-holding ball becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit), the specific hold that becomes a high profit big hit (16R big hit) is included in the subsequent operation holding ball as the earliest specific hold. Alternatively, the hold consecutive suggestion effect may be executed in response to a bonus prize generated during the execution of the special game. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold (or the first jackpot hold if there is more than one jackpot hold) is a low profit jackpot, You may be comprised so that a sho suggestive effect may not be performed. In other words, when the hold consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is definitive to perform the hold-in consecutive play at the high profit big hit (16R big hit).

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, in addition to the occurrence of the bonus prize by the bonus prize production effect, it may be suggested that there is a possibility that the bonus prize has been won. In other words, the bonus prize production and the probable change production may be combined. The probable change suggestion effect is an effect that indicates that the type of the jackpot that has triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probably variable hit), that is, that the game shifts to the probability change game state after the end of the special game. It is. In this modification, for example, a plurality of types of bonus prize sounds A to C are set, and when the type of the jackpot that has been won this time is a normal jackpot, the selectivity of the bonus prize sound A is “70%”, and the bonus prize sound is The selectivity of B is “30%”, and the selectivity of bonus winning sound C is “0%”. When the type of jackpot that has been won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus prize sound A is “10%”, the selection rate of the bonus prize sound B is “30%”, and the selection rate of the bonus prize sound C is "60%". In other words, the probability of change in probability (the degree of expectation of shifting to the probability change game state) increases by one step in the order of "reward winning sound A"<"reward winning sound B"<"reward winning sound C". In addition, as a further modified example, it may be configured to indicate the number of electric support provided after the end of the special game, instead of the degree of expectation of change by the bonus prize sound.

≪General winning opening count-up effect≫
The general winning opening count-up effect is such that when a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of a special game in a consecutive play, the accumulated prize ball number displayed in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733 is displayed. This is an effect of adding and displaying the number of award balls (unit number of award balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 64. In the present embodiment, the specification is such that three prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the general prize hole 64 (the unit prize ball number of the general prize hole 64 is three). When a ball enters the general winning opening 64, the cumulative prize ball number displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 is updated in "3" units. As described above, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative prize ball number counter for counting the cumulative prize ball number, and each time a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (main Each time a general winning opening winning command is received from the control board 100), "3" corresponding to the unit winning number of the general winning opening 64 is added to the count value of the cumulative winning number counter, and the cumulative winning balls are accordingly added. A general winning opening count-up effect in which “3” is added to the value of the accumulated prize ball displayed in the number display area 733 is performed.

  Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of consecutive winning prize mouth count-up effects. The general winning opening count-up effect is, as shown in FIG. 22, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 54, the current value of the cumulative winning number of balls displayed in the cumulative winning number of balls display area 733. In this example, the value of the number of unit prize balls given based on the entry of a game ball into the general winning port 64 is added and displayed by "1" in order in a count-up format. In the illustrated example, the value of the accumulated prize ball count is displayed one by one such as “8000” → “8001” → “8002” → “8003”.

  Note that the general winning opening prize effect (additional prize opening effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is a general winning opening 64 provided in the right area PA2 among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64 during the execution of the special game. The game is performed for entering a game ball. For this reason, during execution of the special game, even if a game ball enters one of the general winning ports 61 to 64 provided in the left area PA1 among the plurality of general winning ports 61 to 64, the general winning port winning effect is not performed. I can't. However, if a game ball enters any of the general winning openings 61 to 64 during execution of the special game, regardless of the type of the general winning openings 61 to 64 (regardless of whether or not to execute the general winning opening winning effect). No), prize balls (three) based on the prize of game balls to the general winning openings 61 to 64 are paid out.

  In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) given by the extra prize is displayed on the cumulative prize balls every time one extra prize is generated. The number of prize balls based on all bonus wins generated during execution of one round game (unit prize balls × number of bonus wins during one round game) is not limited to the number of bonus wins during the execution of one round game. At the end of the game, the number of accumulated prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls to be displayed, or the number of prize balls based on all bonus awards generated during the execution of one special game (unit prize ball number × 1) The number of bonus prizes during the special game) may be displayed together with the cumulative number of prize balls at the end of the last round game or at the end of the special game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the board surface configuration in which the general winning opening 64 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 51 is employed, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A board configuration that is disposed downstream of the starting port 51 may be employed. In that case, the general winning opening 64 may be arranged upstream of the special winning opening 54, or the general winning opening 64 may be arranged downstream of the special winning opening 54.

  Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also be used as an operating opening (operating gate 53) which is a trigger for executing a normal symbol lottery. That is, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting opening 52 is performed, and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) is set. May be configured to be paid out.

  As described above, in the general winning opening prize production effect (additional prize winning effect, general prize opening count-up effect), as described above, a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 when the currently executed game state is the special game state. This is an effect performed in response to this, so that if the game state currently being executed is a non-special game state, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a general winning opening winning effect (additional winning effect, general The winning opening count-up effect) is not performed. In other words, even if the currently running gaming state is a gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main player of the game (non-electric support state), the currently executing gaming state displays the variable display of the second special symbol. Even in the gaming state (electric support state) in which the main subject of the game is played, the general winning opening prize production (additional winning prize production, general prize opening count-up production) is performed when a game ball enters the general winning opening 64. I can't. In addition, when the game state currently being executed is the game state (electric support state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game, the screen is displayed on the assumption that the extended state is still ongoing. In the accumulated prize ball number display area 733, the number of accumulated prize balls acquired in the special game in the extended play (the number of accumulated prize balls at the end of the latest special game) is displayed. However, in this electric support state, only the accumulated number of prize balls acquired in the special game in the extended play is displayed, and even if the game balls enter the general winning opening 64, the number of accumulated prize balls is increased. The number is not added to the number of balls (the general winning opening count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the number of accumulated prize balls does not change (the number of accumulated prize balls at the end of the latest special game is maintained).

  Also, during the execution of the special game performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the determination of the first special symbol is a big hit in the normal game state), even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, , The bonus prize production may not be executed. The special game types include a high profit special game (for example, 16R special game) and a low profit special game (for example, 4R special game). May be configured to execute a bonus prize effect by entering a ball, and not to execute a bonus prize effect even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of the low profit special game. Also, as a type of round game, a long open round game in which a maximum open time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an open time (for example, 29 seconds) in which a game ball having a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. And a short open round game in which the maximum open time of the special winning opening 54 is set to an open time (for example, 2 seconds) in which game balls having a specified count (full count) can enter or are easy to enter. During the execution of the open round game, the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 to execute a bonus prize production effect, and during the execution of the short opening round game, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. The bonus prize rendering effect may not be executed. In addition, during execution of a special game that is performed when a specific big hit (probably variable big hit) is won, a bonus prize production effect is executed by a game ball entering the general winning opening 64, and a normal big hit (non-probable variable big hit) is performed. During the execution of the special game performed when the game is won, the bonus prize effect may not be executed even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64.

<Other features of prize-related productions>
Next, other features of the special winning opening winning effect and the general winning opening winning effect of the present embodiment will be described. Note that the special winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect are effects for the same display object (the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area 733). The up production and the general winning opening count-up production may be simply referred to as “count-up production”.

≪Count-up production time≫
In the present embodiment, the count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from “N” to “N + 1”) is set to “0.03 seconds”. That is, the value of the total number of prize balls displayed in the cumulative number of prize balls display area 733 is counted up by “0.03 seconds”. For this reason, the execution time of the special winning opening count-up effect is determined by adding the number of prize balls (unit) obtained by entering one game ball into the special winning opening 54 to the time value required for counting up one prize ball. The winning time is calculated by multiplying the winning number by the value of “winning prize balls”, and the execution time of the special winning opening count-up effect is “15 (unit prize balls) × 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds” Becomes Similarly, in the general winning opening count-up effect, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball) given when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64 is added to the time value required for counting up one prize ball. Is derived by multiplying the value of (number), and the execution time of the general winning opening count-up effect is “3 (unit prize balls) × 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds”. . In the following, for the sake of convenience, the execution time of the special winning opening count-up effect (the time value from the start of one special winning opening count-up effect to the end thereof) is referred to as “count-up effect time A” and the general winning opening count-up. The execution time of the effect (time value from the start of one general winning opening count-up effect to the end thereof) is abbreviated as “count-up effect time B”. Here, the special winning opening normal winning effect, the over winning effect, and the bonus winning effect are configured not to be executed during the execution of the big hit start demonstration and the big hit end demonstration even during the execution of the special game. Therefore, the special winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect are not executed during the execution of the big hit start demonstration and the big hit end demonstration even during the execution of the special game. ing.

(Relationship 1 of count-up effect time A)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than an interval time (also referred to as an “interval period”) set after the end of each round game. The interval time is a standby time set between each round game or between the last round game and the big hit end demonstration, and is a period during which the closing operation of the big winning opening 54 is maintained from the start of the closing operation. The game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or the end demonstration waiting time. In the present embodiment, the interval time is set to “2 seconds” common to all round games. In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 immediately before the end of a certain round game. Even if the special winning opening count-up effect is performed based on the ball entry, the special winning opening count-up effect is completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the special winning opening count-up effect is performed over the interval period and over the next round game or the big hit end demonstration (if the over-winning is made, the interval period may be exceeded) ), A break between each round game or a break between the last round game and the jackpot end demo can be clarified.

(Relationship 2 of count-up effect time A)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demonstration. As described above, the count-up effect time A is set to “0.45 seconds”, and the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is set to “20 seconds” in common to all the big hit types (big hit medium effects). ing. The execution time of the big hit end demonstration is a standby time from when an interval time after the end of the last round game in the special game elapses to when the special game ends. That is, the execution time of the big hit end demonstration does not include the interval time set after the end of the last round game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the last round game, the entry of a game ball into the special winning opening 54 is effectively detected within that time (that is, the ball is detected as a target for paying out a prize ball, and determined to be an illegally entered ball) It is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the round game which may be detected), but the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is such that the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 within that time. This is set as a preparation time for a game (effect mode) after the end of the special game separated from the round game, which is unlikely to be effectively detected.
In the present embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the big hit end demonstration, so that the game ball can be played just before the end of the final round game. In the case where the special winning opening count-up effect is performed based on the ball entering the special winning opening 54, moreover, even if an over-winning occurs in the final round game, the final round Even if the special winning opening count-up effect is performed even after the closing of the special winning opening 54 after the game (even during the big hit end demonstration period), the special winning opening counts during the big hit end demonstration period. The up production will be completed. As a result, the special winning opening count-up effect does not extend beyond the big hit end demonstration period to the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and the time between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation is not obtained. Separation can be clarified. As a modification, for at least a part of the execution time of the big hit end demonstration, the entry of the game ball into the special winning opening 54 may be effectively detected within the time.

(Relationship 3 for count-up effect time A)
In the present embodiment, when a specified number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 in one round game, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts in this one round game (1 The big winning port count-up effect for the number of prize balls that can be obtained in the round game is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is “0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) × 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds”. On the other hand, the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is set to “20 seconds” in common with all the big hit types (big hit medium effect) as described above. In the present embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the big hit end demonstration, so that the final time Even if a plurality of large winning opening count-up effects are continuously performed based on a plurality of gaming balls continuously entering the special winning opening 54 immediately before the end of the round game, Even after closing the jackpot 54 after the round game (even during the jackpot end demonstration period), if the specification is such that the jackpot opening count-up effect is performed, the jackpot will be provided within the jackpot end demonstration period. The count-up production will be completed. As a result, the special winning opening count-up effect does not extend beyond the big hit end demonstration period to the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and the time between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation is not obtained. Separation can be clarified.

  In addition, also in the case where the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in excess of the prescribed count number in one round game (when an over-prize occurs), the total count number in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A of (the specified count number + the number of over-winning prizes) is set shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demonstration. That is, the time obtained by adding the total time of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up effect time A for the over-winning number is the time after the end of the round game. By setting it shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, even after the closing of the jackpot 54 after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demonstration period), the big win port count-up effect In the case of over-winning, the special winning opening count-up effect is terminated within the execution time of the big hit end demo, and the time between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display is set. It is preferable to clarify In addition, the number of over-winning prizes is indefinite because it depends on the progress of the game (the state of the launch of the game ball and the state of the flow of the game ball). It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up effect time A for the over-winning number are added. Time is 4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds, which is 9 seconds, which is shorter than the jackpot end demonstration execution time of 20 seconds).

(Relation 4 of count-up effect time A)
As a modification of the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 in one round game, the total of the count-up effect time A for the specified number of counts in this one round game. The time may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modified example, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is “0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) × 10 balls (specified count number) = 4.5 seconds”. On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) of the above-described embodiment, and is set to “6 seconds” in common for all round games. In this modification, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is configured to be shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that a certain round game ends. Even when a plurality of large winning opening count-up effects are continuously performed by a plurality of gaming balls continuously entering the big winning prize 54 on the verge, even within the interval time after the end of the round game, The big winning opening count-up effect will be completed. Therefore, the special winning opening count-up effect is not performed over the interval period until the next round game or the big hit end demonstration. Can be clarified.

  In the case where only one game ball enters the special winning opening 54 in a single round game exceeding the prescribed count (when only one ball is over-winned), this one round game is also performed. It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A for the total count number (specified count number + one over-winning number) is set to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. That is, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the count-up effect time A for one over-winning prize is added (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4). .95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so that even if an over-winning occurs, the special winning opening count-up effect is ended within the interval period. It is preferable to clarify the break between round games.

(Relationship 5 of count-up production time A)
As a modified example of the present embodiment, when game balls of a specified count (full count) enter the special winning opening 54 in all round games of one special game, the full count generated during execution of the special game You may be comprised so that the total time of the count-up production time A of minutes (prescribed round number * prescribe count number) may be shorter than the execution time of a big hit end demonstration. In this modification, when the number of prescribed rounds of one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), in all round games, game balls enter the special winning opening by the prescribed number of counts (10 balls). In this case, a special winning opening count-up effect is executed a total of 160 times. Therefore, the total time of the count-up effect time A for all the counts is “0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) × 10 balls (specified count number) × 16 rounds (specified round number) = 72 seconds”. is there. On the other hand, in the present modification, the execution time of the big hit end demonstration is set to “120 seconds” in common to all the big hit types (big hit medium effect). In this modification, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for all the counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the big hit end demonstration. Even if after the closing of the special winning opening 54 after the final round game (even during the big hit end demonstration period), if the special winning opening count-up effect is performed, the special winning opening 54 is entered. Even if there is congestion during the round game or during the interval period due to consecutive winnings of game balls, the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect will be completed at least by the end of the big hit end demonstration Is ensured, so that it is possible to smoothly perform the performance during the big hit.

優先 Priority of the winning prize opening count-up production afterwards ≫
FIG. 23 is a time chart for explaining the priority of the special winning opening count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 23, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) successively enter the special winning opening 54 during execution of a certain round game, two balls based on the consecutive winnings are set. The special winning opening count-up effect of the times is executed. Specifically, when the execution condition of the special winning opening count-up effect is established by the first game ball entering the special winning opening 54, the previous special winning opening count-up effect is executed. Similarly, when the execution condition of the special winning opening count-up effect is established by the second gaming ball winning the special winning opening 54, the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is executed. The execution condition of the special winning opening count-up effect is a condition for starting the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect, and that the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 during the execution of the special game (the special winning prize). It is established when the entrance switch 541 detects that a game ball has been entered. At this time, if the execution condition of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect is in progress. After the execution of the preceding special winning opening count-up effect ends, the subsequent execution of the special winning opening count-up effect is started. In other words, in the present embodiment, of the two special winning opening count-up effects, the priority of the preceding special winning opening count-up effect is set higher than the priority of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect. Before the execution of the first special winning opening count-up effect ends, the execution of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect does not start, and the execution of the first special winning opening count-up effect ends. After that, execution of a later special winning opening count-up effect is started. In addition, after the execution of the first special winning opening count-up effect is completed, when the execution of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is started, the first special winning opening count-up effect and the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect are started. It is preferable that the effect and the effect are connected continuously (seamlessly), and the double winning opening count-up for two times is continuously performed. However, as a modified example, after a predetermined time (minute time) elapses after the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect is finished, the execution of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is started, and A clear break may be provided between the special winning opening count-up effect and the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect. Although the special winning opening count-up effect has been described here, the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specification. During the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution condition of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect is performed. Is established, after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed, the subsequent general winning opening count-up is performed without terminating the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect. It is preferable to configure so as to start execution of the effect. Also, if the execution conditions of the later general winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous winning opening count-up effect is performed halfway. It is preferable to configure so as to start the execution of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect after the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect without ending. In addition, if the execution condition of the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the preceding general winning opening count-up effect is performed halfway. It is preferable to configure so as to start the execution of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect after the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is completed without discontinuation.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, when the execution condition of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect is performed. It may be configured to interrupt and start the execution of the next big winning opening count-up effect. That is, the priority of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is made higher than the priority of the previous special winning opening count-up effect. In that case, when the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect is interrupted, the count value is forcibly changed to the final value of the previous special winning opening count-up effect or the initial value of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect. It is preferable to switch to, and to start the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect from that point. In this modification, the special winning opening count-up effect was described, but the general winning opening count-up effect may have the same specification. When the execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect may be interrupted, and the execution of the next general winning opening count-up effect may be started. In addition, if the execution condition of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous winning opening count-up effect is interrupted, and the next general winning operation is interrupted. The execution of the mouth count-up effect may be started. In addition, if the execution condition of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect is interrupted, and the next special winning opening is executed. The execution of the mouth count-up effect may be started.

(Emphatic production of the number of accumulated prize balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the enhanced effect of the present embodiment. (A) in the figure shows a case where the over-winning prize effect is executed during the execution of the emphasized effect, and (B) in the figure shows a case where the bonus prize effect is executed during the execution of the emphasized effect. In the present embodiment, the value of the cumulative number of prize balls in the consecutive play is set to a predetermined specific value when the game ball enters the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the special game. When it reaches, the emphasis production which notifies that the cumulative prize ball number has reached the specific value is executed. The specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000). That is, each time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000, 20,000, 30,000,...), An emphasis effect is performed. Therefore, the highlight effect may be referred to as a specific value reaching effect, and the highlight display may be referred to as a specific value corresponding display. In the present embodiment, even when the cumulative prize ball count reaches a specific value triggered by an over-winning or bonus prize, an enhanced effect is executed. In this case, the enhanced effect and the over-win The production or bonus prize production is performed in an overlapping manner.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the types of the emphasis effects include an emphasis display effect in which a specific value (in the illustrated example, “20000 pt”) at which the accumulated number of awarded balls has reached is enlarged and displayed in an emphasis display area 735 at the center of the screen. 11 includes an enhanced sound output effect of outputting a special sound (in the illustrated example, a sound of “excellent tone”).

  The highlighting of the specific value is continuously performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), during which time the accumulated prize ball number display is updated (addition display) by entering a game ball into the special winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64. ), The highlighted display is not updated (added display). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of “accumulated prize balls display” <“highlighted display” <“round display”. “Layer” means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image constituting the entire image. Each layer is arranged in a higher layer (a front side as viewed from the player) as the display priority is higher, and is arranged as a lower layer (a rear side as viewed from the player) as the display priority is lower. Is done. In FIG. 24, the highlighted display and the accumulated prize ball number display are not displayed in a superimposed manner. However, the display area may be enlarged and superimposed to further emphasize the emphasized display. Accordingly, the highlighting may be displayed on the front of the cumulative prize ball number display (the highlighting may be displayed covering a part or all of the cumulative prize ball number display).

  As shown in FIG. 24, the prize ball acquisition display area 732 and the highlight display area 735 are provided as separate display areas, and when an over-win or an extra win occurs during the execution of the highlight, , The emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus image are simultaneously displayed. When displaying the emphasized image and the over-winning image or the bonus prize image at the same time, even if the priority of the display of the emphasized image is higher than that of the over-winning image or the bonus prize image, the over-winning image is higher than the emphasized image. Alternatively, the priority of displaying the bonus prize image may be increased. In FIG. 24, the highlighted display and the over-winning image / additional winning image are not displayed in a superimposed manner. However, the display area may be enlarged and superimposed to further emphasize the emphasized display. According to the priority, a highlight may be displayed in front of the over-winning image / additional winning image (highlighting may be displayed over a part or all of the over-winning image / additional winning image).

  When an over-winning prize occurs during the output of the special sound, the over-winning sound or the bonus prize sound is output in duplicate during the output of the special sound. When the special sound and the over-winning sound or the bonus win sound overlap, the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus win sound may be lower than the volume of the special sound having a higher priority, and vice versa. In this case, the volume of the special sound may be lower than the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus prize sound having a high priority. In this case, the sound volume of the lower priority (small sound volume) may be set to substantially “0”.

オ ー バ ー Over prize production at the time of error occurrence / bonus prize production performance≫
In the present embodiment, when various types of errors occur in the gaming machine, it is configured to control whether or not the over-winning effect and the extra bonus winning effect can be executed according to the type of the error. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining an error type of a gaming machine. In the present embodiment, as the types of errors that occur in the gaming machine, “door / frame opening error”, “magnetic sensor error”, “radio wave sensor error”, “disconnection short-circuit power supply error”, “excessive prize error”, “payout error” Is set. Note that the above error types are merely examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

  The door / frame opening error is a door opening switch for detecting the opening of the glass frame 5 and the opening of the front frame 2 when the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 or the back setting board 30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1. This is an error that occurs when, for example, a disconnection or a failure occurs in the frame opening switch that detects the opening of the back setting panel 30 or the opening of the back setting panel 30. This door / frame opening error is canceled when the glass frame 5, the front frame 2, and the back set board 30 are closed by confirming that there is no abnormality in the gaming machine.

  The magnetic sensor error and the radio wave sensor error are errors that occur when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when the radio wave sensor detects a radio wave, and when a disconnection, short circuit, or failure occurs in the magnetic sensor or the radio wave sensor. The magnetic sensor error and the radio sensor error are cleared when the game machine is checked for any abnormality and the power is turned on again.

  The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when disconnection, short-circuit, or failure of various switches provided on the radio wave sensor and the game board surface occurs. The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is canceled when the power is turned on again after confirming that there is no abnormality in the gaming machine.

The excessive winning error is an error that occurs when a game ball excessively enters various winning ports. The excess winning error is canceled when the power of the gaming machine is checked again for abnormality and the power is turned on again. Here, the excessive winning error includes an excessive winning error in the special winning opening 54 (also referred to as a “large winning opening excessive winning error”) and an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 64 (“general winning opening excessive winning error”). "). For example, the special winning opening excessive winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the special winning opening 54 during execution of one round game. The general winning opening excessive winning error occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 per unit time (for example, 30 seconds) or per unit time (for example, 30 seconds). This error occurs when a certain number (for example, 60 balls) of game balls enter the general winning opening 64. Since the general winning opening 64 is arranged so that game balls can easily enter than the general winning openings 61 to 63, the general winning opening 64 has an error determination value based on the number of incoming balls per unit time (error and error). (The value of the number of game balls to be determined). In the present embodiment, when a special winning opening excessive winning error occurs, or when a ball enters the special winning opening 54 in a state where the special winning opening 54 is not opened (during a non-special game), When an abnormal winning with respect to the special winning opening 54 is detected (when it is determined that the winning is abnormal), the external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, when the general winning opening excessive winning error occurs, that is, when an abnormal winning regarding the general winning openings 61 to 64 is detected (when it is determined that the winning is abnormal).
Does not output an external information signal (security signal) from the external information terminal plate 600 indicating that an error has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output from the external information terminal plate 600 will be described later.

  The payout error is an error that occurs when the payout of prize balls is hindered. The payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball tray 9 is full of game balls (a full switch is turned on), a ball biting / ball jam error of the prize ball payout unit 34, and replenishment of game balls from the game island. Includes a ballless error that is insufficient because it is not possible. When a full tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. The notification level 1 is a level in a state where the ON state continues for 30 seconds after the full switch is turned on. At the notification level 1, only the voice notification “Please pull out the ball” is executed. In the notification level 1, even if there is a ball in the special winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is not restricted (the prize ball payout is not stopped). When the ON state exceeds 30 seconds, the display shifts to the notification level 2 and displays not only a voice notification that "Please pull out the ball" but also an "image that prompts the ball removal of the lower ball plate" on the effect display device 70. Further, even if there is a ball in the special winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, the payout of the winning ball is restricted (the payout of the winning ball is stopped). As a modified example, the specification may be such that only the image notification is performed at the notification level 1 and both the image notification and the sound notification are performed at the notification level 2. Regarding the ball biting / ball jam error of the prize ball payout unit 34 and the ballless error that is insufficient because game balls cannot be replenished from the game island, even if there is a ball in the large winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 61 to 64, The award ball payout is restricted (award ball payout is stopped).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, various errors are classified into “first errors”, “second errors”, and “third errors” according to the priorities (importance) of the errors. The first error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a medium level. The first error includes a “door / frame opening error”. The second error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a high level. The second error includes “magnetic sensor error”, “radio wave sensor error”, “disconnection short-circuit power supply error”, and “excessive winning error”. The third error is an error type in which the priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult is set to a low level. The third error includes a “payout error”.

  Here, when the above error occurs in the gaming machine, an image effect, a sound effect, and the like are performed as various error notifications. Specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70. Then, an error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at the error volume. In addition, as a modified example of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to be blinked and displayed at the luminance for the error.

In the present embodiment, when the gaming machine has a first error (door / frame opening error), a part of the over prize production or a part of the extra prize production is performed even if an over prize or an extra prize occurs. It is configured so as not to be disturbed. That is, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, the execution of the over-winning image display effect and the extra bonus image display effect out of the over-winning effect and the extra bonus winning effect is allowed, but the over-winning sound output effect and The execution of the bonus prize sound output effect is restricted. Even if an over prize or a bonus prize occurs during the first error, the over-prize effect and the bonus prize effect are not partially performed, so that the gaming machine is not overlooked in the first error state. It has become. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (the special winning opening count-up effect and the general winning opening count-up effect) is permitted. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed to notify that the first error has occurred, but the error image is not displayed on the full screen. Are displayed using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over-winning image or the bonus image, but they can all be displayed at the same time, and the count-up effect can be displayed at the same time. However, while the error notification sound for notifying the first error is being output, the over-winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). In the case where the gaming machine is in the first error state, when an over-win or an extra win occurs, the payout of the prize ball based on the over-win or the extra win is performed.

  If the gaming machine has a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio sensor error, disconnection short-circuit power supply error, excessive winning error), even if an over-winning or an extra win occurs, an over-winning or extra-winning effect is produced. Are not performed. That is, when the second error occurs in the gaming machine, the execution of both the over winning image display effect and the over winning sound output effect is restricted as the over winning effect, and the bonus winning image display effect and Both execution of the bonus prize sound output effect is restricted. Even if an over-winning prize occurs during the second error, all of the over-winning prizes and the like are not performed, so that the gaming machine is not overlooked in the second error state. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also limited. Specifically, when a second error occurs, an error image indicating the second error is displayed on the entire screen in order to notify that the second error has occurred. The winning image and the count-up effect are not displayed. In addition, while the error notification sound for notifying that the error is the second error is being output, the over-winning sound and the bonus winning sound are not output. When the gaming machine is in the second error state and an over-win or bonus win occurs, payout of award balls based on the over-win or bonus win is performed.

  In addition, even if the gaming machine becomes a third error (payout error) and the prize ball cannot be paid out, if an over prize or an extra prize occurs, an over prize effect or an extra prize is generated. The winning effect is configured to be executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk that the game will be continued even if the game is continued, and there is no risk that the player will be disadvantaged. This is because limiting the production may rather reduce the interest in the game. In this case, the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect and general winning opening count-up effect) is also executed. However, when the gaming machine is in the third error state, if an over-win or an extra win occurs, the payout of the prize ball based on the over-win or the extra win is not performed.

  In the present embodiment, when an over-winning or bonus win occurs when the gaming machine has the “specific error”, a part or all of the over-winning effect is performed according to the type of the generated error. In addition to being restricted, a part or all of the bonus prize production is restricted. In other words, when the first error has occurred among the specific errors, execution of one or a part of the over-winning effect effects (over-winning sound output effect) is restricted, and the second error is suppressed. When this occurs, execution of a plurality or all of the element effects (over-winning sound output effects, over-winning image display effects, etc.) out of the over-winning effects is limited. This is because, in the present embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error is an error type having a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. Note that the specific error may be an error type for which the progress of the game is prohibited. Further, the specific error may be an error type that occurs when an abnormality that is suspected to be a fraudulent act (goto act) is detected. Further, a specific error may be set as an error type that is resolved by turning off / on the power.

As a modification of the present embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect to be higher than that of the over winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is output with priority over the over winning sound (for example, the over winning sound). The error notification sound may be set to have a higher sound level than the error notification sound), and the error notification image may be displayed with higher priority than the over-winning image (for example, the error notification image has a layer priority over the over-winning image). May be set higher).

オ ー バ ー Over winning prize production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not an over winning effect is performed at the end of the big hit. In each round game, a detection effective period (large winning opening effective period) in which detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 541 is effective is set. The detection validity period is set in consideration of the time required for a game ball that has entered just before the special winning opening 54 closes to reach the special winning opening switch 541. In the present embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from opening to closing of the special winning opening 54), and the end of the round game (the closing of the special winning opening 54). The detection valid period of the special winning opening switch 541 is set over the entire period including the interval period until the predetermined time elapses. By setting the detection validity period from the round period to the interval period, even if a gaming ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 during the interval period after the round period ends, the special winning opening 54 is set. The winning of the game ball to is treated as valid (it becomes the target of the prize ball payout). That is, the “round game execution period (large winning opening period)” and the above-mentioned “detection grace period (interval period)” are set as continuous detection effective periods. Further, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

  In the present embodiment, within the interval period, an over-winning effect allowable period in which the execution of the over-winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the over-winning effect is reached is set. On the other hand, the outside of the interval period is set as an over-winning-prize effect prohibition period in which the execution of the over-win-win effect is prohibited even when the execution timing of the over-win-win effect has come.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), within the interval period after the end of the last round game, the number of game balls (11 in the illustrated example) exceeding the specified count number by the special winning opening switch 541. When an over-prize effect is executed within this interval period, the execution of the over-prize effect within this interval period is permitted. However, if the production time of the over-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, the entire over-winning effect is executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over-winning prize production at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, when an over-winning effect includes an over-winning image and an over-winning sound, the over-winning image may be interrupted (not displayed or erased from the middle), and the over-winning sound may be output without interruption. Good. Also, as with the over-winning effect, the special winning opening count-up effect may be executed when the over-winning during the interval period is triggered. In that case, the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect starts at the end of the interval period. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all the special winning opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period, so based on the end of the interval period, the special winning opening count-up effect is set to the end timing of the interval period. It is desirable to stop forcibly.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), a game ball exceeding the specified number of counts at the special winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the last round game (the eleventh game in the illustrated example) Even if the ball is detected, when the execution timing of the over-winning prize effect arrives within the big hit end demonstration period after the elapse of this interval period, the execution of the over-winning effect within this big hit end demonstration period Is forbidden. However, during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the over-winning prize production is only prohibited, and the prize balls are paid out based on the over-winning prize. In the above case, the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as in the case of the over winning effect.

  Note that, as a modification of the present embodiment, the big win end demonstration period is set as an over-winning effect allowable period in which the execution of the over-winning effect is allowed, and the over-winning effect is executed during the execution of the big hit end demonstration. You may. In this case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time in the big hit end demonstration period as the over-prize-winning-effect allowable period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demonstration period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the over winning effect allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the over winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modified example, an over winning effect allowable period and an over winning effect prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the last round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the interval period of 2 seconds may be set. Seconds may be set as an over-prize-producing effect allowable period, and 0.5 seconds thereafter may be set as an over-win-winning effect prohibition period, and the subsequent big hit end demonstration period may be set as an over-win-winning effect prohibition period. Further, as a further modified example, considering that the timing at which the gaming ball exceeding the specified count is detected by the special winning opening switch 541 is synchronized with the execution timing of the over-winning effect, the final round is performed. In the interval after the end of the round game, if a game ball exceeding the specified count is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, an over-winning effect is always executed (at the end timing of the interval period). As described above, when the execution time is longer than the time from the start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, as described above, Based on the end, the over-winning prize production will be forcibly interrupted at the end of the interval period On the other hand, if an over-winning effect includes an over-winning image and an over-winning sound, the over-winning image is interrupted (not displayed or erased), and the over-winning sound is output without interruption. If the game ball to the special winning opening 54 is detected during the big hit end demonstration period (when the game ball exceeding the specified count is detected by the special winning opening switch 541). May be configured so that the over-winning effect is not executed, in which case, the special winning opening count-up effect is also performed by the special winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the last round game. Will be executed whenever a game ball exceeding the limit is detected (excluding the entry at the end timing of the interval period). As described above, if the duration of the special winning opening count-up effect is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the special winning opening count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period, the special winning prize is determined based on the end of the interval period. The mouth count-up effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period, and when a game ball is detected in the special winning opening 54 during the big hit end demonstration period (by the special winning opening switch 541). (When a game ball exceeding the prescribed count number is detected), it may not be executed.

オ Bonus prize production at the end of the big hit≫
FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not an extra bonus prize production is performed at the end of the big hit. In the present embodiment, within the period of the round period and the period of the interval period, when the execution timing of the bonus prize winning effect has come, the bonus prize rendering effect allowable period in which the execution of the bonus prize rendering effect is permitted is set. On the other hand, within the period of the big hit end demonstration period, even if the execution timing of the bonus prize production has come, the bonus prize production prohibition period in which the execution of the bonus prize production is prohibited is set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, the time interval within this interval period is reduced. When the bonus prize production execution timing comes, the execution of the bonus prize production within this interval period is permitted. However, if the production time of the bonus prize production (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the bonus prize production to the end timing of the interval period, the entire bonus prize production is executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus prize production at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period. However, when the bonus prize production includes the bonus prize image and the bonus prize sound, the bonus prize image may be interrupted (displayed or deleted from the middle), and the bonus prize sound may be output without interruption. Good. Also, as with the bonus prize winning effect, the special winning opening count-up effect may be executed with the bonus prize winning within the interval period as an opportunity, in which case, the execution start timing of the special winning opening count-up effect and the end of the interval period If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all the special winning opening count-up effects by the end of the interval period, so based on the end of the interval period, the special winning opening count-up effect is set to the end timing of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly interrupt.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), even if a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, this interval period When the timing of executing the bonus prize production effect arrives during the big hit end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus prize production effect within the big hit end demonstration period is prohibited. However, during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus prize production is only prohibited, and the prize balls are paid out based on the bonus prize. Further, in the above case, the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect may be prohibited as in the bonus prize effect.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, the big hit end demonstration period is set as an extra bonus prize production allowable period in which the execution of the extra bonus prize production is allowed, and the extra bonus prize production is executed during the execution of the big hit end demonstration. You may. In this case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the big hit end demonstration period as the bonus prize production effect allowable period. As an example, out of the 20 seconds of the big hit end demonstration period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the bonus prize production allowable period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the bonus prize production inhibition period. Further, as a further modification, an extra bonus prize production effect period and an extra bonus prize production prohibition period may be set within the interval period after the last round. For example, the first 1.5 seconds of the interval period of 2 seconds may be set. Seconds may be the bonus prize production allowable period, the subsequent 0.5 seconds may be the bonus prize production prohibition period, and the bonus hit ending demonstration period may be the bonus prize production prohibition period. Further, as a further modified example, considering that the timing at which the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 and the execution timing of the bonus prize production effect are synchronized, after the end of the final round game, When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 during the interval period of (1), a bonus prize winning effect is always executed (excluding a ball entering at the end timing of the interval period). As described above, if the time of the bonus prize production is longer than the time from the start timing of the bonus prize production to the end of the interval period, the bonus prize production is performed based on the end of the interval period. On the other end of the game (except for the bonus prize production, When the image and the bonus prize sound are provided, the bonus prize image may be interrupted (not displayed or deleted from the middle), and the bonus prize sound may be output without interruption. When a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 (when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641), an extra bonus winning effect may not be executed. The general winning opening count-up effect is always executed when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the last round game (at the end timing of the interval period). As described above, the execution time of the general winning opening count-up effect is shorter than the time of the general winning opening count-up effect. If it is longer than the time from the start timing to the end timing of the interval period, the general winning opening count-up effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period based on the end of the interval period, and the big hit end demonstration period If a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 in the middle (when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641), it may not be executed.

  On the other hand, during the period of the jackpot start demonstration period, the game ball does not theoretically enter the large winning opening 54 (because there is no over-prize), so during the jackpot start demonstration period, the big win No mouth winning effect (over winning effect) is executed. It is possible to enter the general winning opening 64 even during the jackpot start demonstration period, but even if the general winning opening 64 is entered, the general winning opening winning effect ( No bonus prize production) is performed, and if the ball is entered during the jackpot start demonstration period at any time (especially, even if it enters at the end of the jackpot start demonstration period), the entry The general prize mouth prize production (additional prize production) corresponding to the ball will not be performed in the first round game after the end of the big hit demonstration, and the prize ball (number of prize balls) corresponding to the ball will be It is not an accumulation target in the accumulated prize ball number display.

(Launch handle detection)
The game by the present gaming machine PM is executed on the premise that the player rotates the firing handle 12 to fire the game ball toward the game area PA. The firing handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 12. The touch sensor includes a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance caused by a player touching the firing handle 12. When detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 12, the touch sensor outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 300, which permits the firing solenoid to be energized. Further, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits an effect control command (handle state effect command) to the effect control board 200. Thereby, the effect control board 200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 12 (whether or not the firing handle 12 is operated).

  FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over-winning effect and the general winning effect. Even when the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the firing handle 12 (when the firing of the game ball is stopped), the effect controlling means 220 wins the game ball that has been fired before that big win. When a game ball (an eleventh game ball in the illustrated example) exceeding the specified count is detected by entering the mouth 54 (when an over-winning occurs), an over-winning effect is executed. It has become. Similarly, even when it is not detected that the player is touching the firing handle 12 (when the firing of the game ball has been stopped), the production generalizing means 220 determines that the game ball fired before that time has a general prize. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 by entering the mouth 64 (when an extra prize occurs), an extra prize effect is executed. That is, the over prize production and the bonus prize production are performed irrespective of the detection result of the touch sensor at the timing of the over prize and the bonus prize. Therefore, even if the launch of the game ball by the player is stopped due to the closing of the special winning opening 54 (the round game ends), an over-win or an extra win occurs during the interval period. At that time, an over-prize effect or a bonus prize effect will occur, and dissatisfaction such as no prize effect is performed even though the game ball actually enters the large win port 54 or the general win port 64. It is possible to prevent the player from having distrust.

(Preparation for game start)
In the present embodiment, when the currently executed game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), the standby state of the game is performed when the interrupted state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more (customer wait demonstration state). Is executed. "The interruption state of the game continues for a predetermined time or more" means, for example, that a period in which no special design operation pending ball is present continues for a predetermined time or more, and a period in which the special symbol fluctuation display is not performed is a predetermined time This means that a period in which the game ball does not enter or pass through the specific winning opening continues for a predetermined time or more, and a period in which the game ball is not fired continues for a predetermined time or more. The condition for terminating the standby demonstration effect is when the interrupted state of the game is released (when the game is started or restarted), and, for example, when the player touches the firing handle 12 (operated the firing handle 12). ) Is detected by the touch sensor, or when there is a ball entering the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52 which is a specific winning port, and the passing of the game ball to the operating gate 53 is applicable. This does not apply to ball entry to the general winning openings 61 to 64 (even if game balls pass through the operation gate 53 or ball entry to the general winning openings 61 to 64), the standby demonstration effect does not end. Also, during the stand-by demonstration, the sound volume is zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than the state where the stand-by demonstration is not performed (during game), A volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demonstration effect is not ended even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in the situation where the game is interrupted, there is no need to perform more than necessary, so mute or volume reduction is performed, but even in this state, the standby demonstration effect is maintained (the game is interrupted). After the standby demonstration effect is completed, the volume of the effect after the end of the standby demonstration effect (during the progress of the game, that is, while the symbols are being changed) can be adjusted and visualized even during the standby demonstration effect.

  FIG. 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over-winning effect and the bonus prize effect are executed. During the execution of the stand-by demonstration, the production control means 220 triggers the stand-by demonstration when the contact of the player is detected by the touch sensor (when the steering-state production command is received from the main control board 100). The execution of the effect ends, and the execution of the game start preparation effect (firing detection effect) is started. The game start preparation effect is, for example, an effect of displaying the word “welcome” on the screen or outputting a sound of “welcome” from the speaker 11 to give a real feeling that the game has been started or restarted (effect that welcomes the game). ). This game start preparation effect is an effect performed immediately after the standby demonstration effect ends, and is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state), similarly to the standby demonstration effect.

  In the present embodiment, in a gaming state (non-special gaming state) in which a game start preparation effect can be performed, an over-winning effect or a bonus prize effect is not executed, and an over-winning effect or a bonus prize effect can be performed. In the state (special game state), the game start preparation effect is not performed. In other words, the game start preparation effect and the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect are not performed in the same game state, and, of course, are not performed at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is restored)
In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs during execution of a special game, when returning from the power failure, a power return notification effect for notifying that the power has been recovered from the power failure is executed. The power-off return notification effect is, for example, an effect of displaying an image (power-return notification image) indicating that the power has returned, and outputting a sound (power-return notification sound) indicating that the power has returned from the speaker 11. It is. In the present embodiment, the execution time of the power-return effect (output time of the power-return notification sound) is longer than “29 seconds”, which is the maximum time of one round game (long open round game), and is “30”. Seconds ". For example, when a power failure occurs in the middle of a predetermined round game and the power is restored in the middle of the predetermined round game (when restarted in the middle of the predetermined round game), at least during the remaining time of the round game Will output a power-off return sound, so that the player can reliably recognize that the round game is restarting. Here, when the power-off return sound and the big hit middle production sound conflict, the power-off return sound is prioritized over the big hit middle production sound (for example, the power-off return sound is output at a larger sound level than the big hit middle production sound). Or stop the output of the production sound during the big hit). Further, when the power-off return sound is output, even if an over-winning occurs in the round game after the restart, the power-off return sound is given priority over the over-winning sound (for example, the power-off return sound is over the over-winning sound). The return sound may be output at a loud sound level, or the output of the over-winning sound may be stopped. In addition, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is longer than the output time of the sound (power restoration notification sound) indicating that the power has been restored so that it is possible to recognize that a big hit has occurred. For example, the display time of an image (power return notification image) indicating that the power is restored is set to 15 seconds, and the output time of the sound (power return notification sound) indicating that the power is restored is 30 seconds. Desirably seconds. In addition, in the situation where an image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is displayed, the effect during the big hit is not displayed, so that the accumulated prize ball number display, the highlighted display, the over prize winning image and the bonus prize image are displayed. It will not be displayed. Further, at the time of power-off, since the effect information on the accumulated prize sphere value held before the power-off is erased, an image indicating that the power at the time of power-off is restored (power-on When the display of the notification image) is completed and the effect of the big hit is displayed, the accumulated prize ball number display is restarted from zero ("0"), and the display condition of the highlight display is also reached (the specified value is reached). Since the accumulated prize ball number display before the power is turned off reaches a specific value when the ball enters the next big winning port 54 (for example, 10,000 pieces). However, during the big hit after the power is turned off and the power is restored, the accumulated prize ball display is zero. Is not highlighted even if there is only one ball It becomes door. In addition, when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored at the time of the power-off recovery (power-return notification image) ends and the effect during the big hit is displayed, the image indicating that the power has been recovered (power-return notification image) During the display of, if there is a ball entry into the special winning opening 54 or a ball entry into the general winning opening 64, the prize ball corresponding to the entry is paid out, but an image indicating that the power supply is restored ( During the display of the power return notification image), the display of the over-winning image, the display of the bonus winning image, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls, the count-up effect (counting-up effect of the special winning opening, the counting-up effect of the general winning opening) are not performed. At this time, (1) even if the display of the image indicating that the power supply has been restored (power supply restoration notification image) has been completed and the operation has returned to the big hit effect, the accumulated prize ball number display may start from zero. And (2) the power is restored When the display of the image indicating the effect (power return notification image) ends and the game returns to the big hit effect, the accumulated prize ball number display indicates that the large display during the display of the image indicating the power return (power return notification image) is large. A cumulative prize ball number display may be added to the value of the prize ball payout corresponding to the ball entering the winning port 54 or the general winning port 64. In addition, the prize ball corresponding to the count-up effect in which the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) is being executed before the power is turned off, and the count-up effect has not been completed yet. If the power is cut off when the payout is still in progress and not yet completed (for example, during the count-up effect and payout for 300 winning balls), after the power is restored, the power The rest of the count-up effect performed before the occurrence of the interruption is not performed, but award balls that have not been paid out are paid out.

(Right-hit notification image)
During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17 described above, the right-to-right display area 731 of the screen prompts the player to make a right-to-right (to fire a game ball aiming at the right-side area PA2). A hit notification image is displayed. In addition, an over-winning image is displayed in the first winning ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen when an over-winning occurs. The right-handed display area 731 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the over-winning image are separately displayed in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Further, during the execution of the special game, an extra bonus prize image is displayed in the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B of the screen, triggered by occurrence of an extra bonus prize. The right-handed display area 731 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the bonus prize winning image are separately displayed in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Therefore, if an over-win or bonus win occurs during the execution of a special game, the over-win image or the bonus win image does not overlap with the right-turned notification image, and one information does not hide the other information. I have.

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram illustrating a volume adjustment screen according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the left and right keys of the cross key are simultaneously operated by the player during the execution of the special game, a volume adjustment image indicating a plurality of levels of volume is displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen. Is done. The volume adjustment image indicates the current volume level. In the illustrated example, the volume adjustment image has a display mode adjusted to the third volume level corresponding to the current volume level. When the left key or the right key is operated by the player, the output level (volume level) of the sound such as BGM or sound effect output from the speaker 11 can be adjusted. Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is being displayed, operating the right key increases the volume level, and operating the left key lowers the volume level.

  In this embodiment, irrespective of whether the special game is being executed, moreover, it is during the execution of the over-winning effect (the situation where the over-winning sound is output) or during the execution of the bonus winning effect (the extra bonus). Regardless of whether a winning sound is output), the player can operate the left and right keys to adjust the volume of the speaker 11. For this reason, the volume is adjusted by the player during the execution of the over-winning effect (the situation where the over-winning sound is output) or during the execution of the extra-winning effect (the situation where the extra-winning sound is output). In such a case, the adjusted volume level changes in real time as the volume level of the over-winning sound or the bonus prize sound currently being output. That is, the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus prize sound is changed in the middle by performing the volume adjustment operation by the player, so that the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus prize sound is different before and after the volume adjusting operation. It is possible to make it. Note that the audio image display area 736 and the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the over-winning image are separately displayed in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Similarly, the audio image display area 736 and the second prize ball acquisition display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus prize image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Therefore, when an over-winning prize or a bonus prize occurs during the execution of a special game, the over-winning prize image or the bonus prize winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and one information does not hide the other information. . The highlighting and the volume adjustment screen are superimposed when they are executed at the same time, but the volume adjustment screen has a higher display priority, and when superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighting (Some or all of the highlighted display is hidden on the volume adjustment screen.)

≫Conditions for excessive winning error in general winning opening≫
The “error occurrence condition” is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In the present embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that the predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, and the effect is produced. An error notification effect is performed by the control board 200.

  Hereinafter, as one of a plurality of types of error occurrence conditions, an excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 64 will be described. In the present embodiment, out of the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the conditions for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 are set to different conditions.

The condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the number of game balls entering the general winning openings 61 to 63 within the unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning opening switch 611). Is a condition that is satisfied when the first specified number is reached. The first prescribed number is, for example,
"30" is set. That is, when 30 game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 for 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is satisfied.

  The condition for the occurrence of the excess winning error in the general winning opening 64 is that the number of game balls won to the general winning opening 64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) is the second specified number. Is a condition that is satisfied when the condition has been reached. The second prescribed number is set to, for example, “60”. That is, when 60 gaming balls enter the general winning opening 64 in 30 seconds, the condition for generating an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 is satisfied.

  As a modification of the present embodiment, an excess winning error occurrence condition for the general winning openings 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of the game state currently being executed. For example, if the change display of the first special symbol is a game state (normal game state) in which the game is the main body, the general winning ports 61 to 63 have a relatively higher ball entry frequency per unit time than the general winning port 64. Therefore, the threshold for satisfying the condition is set to be higher in the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning openings 61 to 63 than in the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 64. In this case, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 under a predetermined condition (predetermined entering frequency), the excess winning error condition is not satisfied. If a prize is won under a predetermined condition (predetermined pitching frequency), an excessive winning error will occur. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly performed (probable changing gaming state, time-saving gaming state), the general winning opening 64 is more frequently entered than the general winning openings 61 to 63 per unit time. Should be relatively high, so that the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 64 is set to be higher than the excess winning error occurrence condition of the general winning opening 61 to 63 so that the threshold value of the condition establishment is higher. ing. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 under specific conditions (specific entering frequency), an excessive winning error is not established, but the game ball is specified in the general winning opening 61 to 64. If the ball is entered under the conditions (specific entry frequency), an excessive winning error will occur.

  In addition, even if the condition of generating an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the condition of generating an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is canceled. It is preferable that the condition and the condition for canceling the excess winning error of the right general winning opening 64 be set to the same condition. The error canceling condition is, for example, a condition for ending the error notification effect (for example, display of an error notification screen / 30 seconds after the start of the error notification sound), an ON output of an outer end signal related to an excessive winning error, or the like. The condition for stopping (the condition for turning off the output, for example, 300 seconds after the start of the output), the case of once turning off the power, and then restoring the power are applicable.

重複 Overrunning prize production and bonus prize production 重複
FIG. 31 is a time chart for explaining the overlapping execution of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In the present embodiment, when the over-winning prize and the bonus prize occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning prize production and the extra prize-winning production can be performed in an overlapping manner. The overlapping execution of the over prize production and the bonus prize production is that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over prize production and the execution period (or execution timing) of the extra prize production are overlapped. Are overlapped, and a case where a part of the execution periods of both effects are overlapped. The illustrated example shows a case where the execution period of the over-winning prize effect and the execution period of the extra prize-winning effect partially overlap. In the case where the over-winning effect and the bonus prize production are performed in an overlapping manner, the first prize-ball obtaining display area 732A in which the over-winning image is displayed and the second prize-ball obtaining display area 732B in which the bonus prize image is displayed. Are provided as display areas that are independent of each other, so that the over-winning image and the bonus win image are not superimposed on each other. On the other hand, the over prize sound and the bonus prize sound may be output in duplicate, or only one of them may be output. If only one of them is output, the first prize may be given priority (that is, the first prize is a prize in the large prize port 54, and the second prize is a prize in the general prize port 64). In this case, the over-winning sound is prioritized. If the first winning is a winning in the general winning opening 64, and if the subsequent winning is a winning in the large winning opening 54, the bonus win sound is prioritized). Priority may be given to a prize (that is, if the first prize is a prize in the large prize port 54 and the second prize is a prize in the general prize port 64, the bonus prize sound is prioritized and the first prize is selected. Is a prize in the general prize port 64, and when the subsequent prize is a prize in the large prize port 54, the over-prize sound is prioritized). When the first prize is prioritized, for example, when a later prize is output during the output of the prize sound related to the first prize, the prize sound related to the second prize is output after the prize sound related to the first prize is completely output. The output may be started, or a prize sound related to a later prize may not be output at all. In the case of giving priority to a later prize, for example, when there is a later prize during the output of the prize sound relating to the earlier prize, the prize sound relating to the earlier prize is interrupted by the later prize, and thereafter, May be started to output the winning sound related to the winning.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, when the over-winning prize and the bonus prize occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning image and the bonus prize-winning image may not be overlappedly displayed. In other words, when the over-winning and the bonus win occur at substantially the same timing, the display period (or display timing) of the over-winning image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus win image do not overlap. Good. In this case, there are cases where the entire display periods of both images do not overlap, and cases where some of the display periods of both images do not overlap.

  In the case where the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not overlapped, the one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that wins first in time (the one in which the game ball is first detected). May be configured to preferentially display the winning image. On the other hand, when the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in an overlapping manner, the one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that wins later in time (when the ball of the game ball later enters the game ball). The winning image of the detected person) may be displayed preferentially.

(Multiple winnings)
FIG. 32 is a time chart in a case where an over-winning win and an extra win have occurred a plurality of times within a predetermined period. In the present embodiment, when a plurality of over-winnings occur within a predetermined period (in the illustrated example, an interval period), an over-winning effect is produced for the first over-winning (winning of the eleventh game ball). Is performed, but an over-winning effect is not performed for the second or subsequent over-winning (winning of the twelfth or later game balls). That is, when a plurality of over-winning prizes occur within a predetermined period, only the execution of the first over-winning effect is permitted, and the execution of the second and subsequent over-winning effects is restricted (restricted). ). However, the prize balls are paid out twice for over-winning, and the winning prize opening count-up effect due to over-winning is also performed twice (the first prize opening count-up effect is performed twice without interruption). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a plurality of bonus prizes occur within a predetermined period (in the illustrated example, an interval period), a bonus prize production effect is performed for each bonus prize, and the prize by the bonus prize is performed. The ball payout is also performed twice, and the bonus win prize port count-up effect is also performed twice (the first general prize port count-up effect is performed twice without interruption). That is, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period, execution of all of the bonus prize productions a plurality of times is permitted. As a modified example, when a plurality of over-winnings occurs within a predetermined period, an over-winning effect is performed for the first over-winning (winning of the eleventh game ball), and the second and subsequent over-winning effects are performed. The over-winning effect is also performed for the over-winning (winning of the twelfth and subsequent game balls). On the other hand, if the second over-winning is performed during the execution of the first over-winning effect, ( 1) After the first over-winning effect has been completed (after completion), the execution of the second over-winning effect is started, or (2) Even if the first over-winning effect is in progress. A configuration may be adopted in which the execution is interrupted after the second over-winning prize, and then the execution of the second over-winning effect is started. In such a case, in any of (1) and (2), the winning prize ball is paid out twice due to the over-winning, and the large winning opening count-up effect due to the over winning is also performed twice (the first winning prize counting in the first time). It is preferable to perform two times without interrupting the up effect). Further, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period, the bonus prize production is performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize production is performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, if there is a second or subsequent bonus prize during the execution of the first bonus prize production, (3) the second time after the first bonus prize production is completed (after completion). Or (4) even if the first bonus prize production is in progress, interrupted by the second bonus prize, and then start the second bonus prize production It may be configured as follows. In this case, in any of (3) and (4), the bonus ball payout by the bonus prize is performed twice, and the general prize port count-up effect by the bonus prize is also performed twice (the first general prize port count). It is preferable to perform two times without interrupting the up effect).

≪External information signal≫
In the present embodiment, the external information signal (external end signal) output from the external information terminal plate 600 as external information to an external device outside the machine includes, for example, a prize ball signal, a big hit signal, a signal during a continuous game, and a symbol determination signal. , A door frame opening signal, a security signal, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (abnormal entrance ball passing time, etc.) signal, and the like.

  Here, examples of the external device installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display and a hall computer. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (gaming information) relating to the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is a useful judgment material for a player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer tallies the operating state of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on an external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the game store, and It is a device that manages the operation status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without using a data display.

(Prize ball signal)
The prize ball signal is an external information signal output for a predetermined time every time a predetermined number (in this embodiment, “10”) of game balls are paid out from the gaming machine. That is, in the present embodiment, every time ten prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). In the present embodiment, a prize ball number counter for counting the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided, and one payout ball is provided by a payout detection switch provided in the prize ball payout unit 34. Every time it is detected, “1” is added to the winning ball number counter. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches a predetermined number “10”, a prize ball signal is output from the external information terminal plate 600. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches a predetermined number “10”, the count value returns to the initial value “0” (that is, it is counted from the initial value “0”).

FIG. 33 is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters the general winning port 64. In the present embodiment, the number of award balls (unit number of award balls) given based on one game ball entering the general winning opening 64 is “3”. Therefore, when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and “3” is added to the value of the prize ball counter. You. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, when the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is in a range from “0” to “6” (corresponding to “0” in the illustrated example), The value of the winning ball number counter after the addition does not reach the predetermined number, and no winning ball signal is output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, the value of the prize ball number counter before addition is “7” to “
In the case of being within the range of "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), the value of the added prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number once, so that the prize ball signal is output once. It will be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prize ball signal is output even once when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64 (when the general winning opening normal winning effect is executed once). In some cases, the prize ball signal is output once. In the above description, among the plurality of general winning ports 61 to 64, the general winning port 64 has been described as an example, but the same can be said for the general winning ports 61 to 63.

  FIG. 34 is a time chart of a prize ball signal when a game ball enters the special winning opening 54. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) given based on one game ball entering the special winning opening 54 is “15”. For this reason, when the entrance of a game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and “15” is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. . At this time, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of “0” to “4” (corresponding to “0” in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition is a predetermined value. By reaching the number once, the prize ball signal is output once. On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball number counter before the addition is in the range of “5” to “9” (corresponding to “5” in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball number counter after the addition is a predetermined number. , The prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a prize is triggered when one game ball enters the special winning opening 54 (when the special winning opening normal winning effect or the special winning over-winning effect is executed once). There are a case where the ball signal is output once and a case where the prize ball signal is output twice.

<Relationship with other big hit productions>
Next, a description will be given of the relationship between the winning-related effects (large winning opening winning effects, general winning opening winning effects) and other mid-spot effects. In the following, examples of (C) pending consecutive suggestion productions, (D) promotion productions, and (E) special productions are shown as other big hit productions.

≪C. Suggested rendezvous ≫
The holding rendezvous suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that a holding in-house is established during the execution of the special game (a jackpot reservation exists). As described above, the "holding in-house" refers to a special design relating to the operation-holding ball when the result of the special symbol determination made by digesting a certain preceding operation-holding ball is a big hit. It is expected that a jackpot will be formed in one or more subsequent operation-holding balls existing at a predetermined timing between the time when the symbol hit determination is permitted and the end of the special game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity. It means that an operation holding ball (also referred to as “big hit holding”) is included. In the present embodiment, the gaming state at the time of occurrence of the big hit which is an execution trigger of the currently executing special game is the specific gaming state (high base state), and the gaming state after the end of the special game is also the specific gaming state. In the case of the state (high base state), that is, when the extended play is being continued, if there is a jackpot hold in the hold, a hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed in the special game currently being executed. Conversely, if the gaming state at the time of the occurrence of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the normal gaming state (low base state), even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold, The pending consecutive suggestion effect is not executed in the running special game. In addition, it is preferable that the special game currently being executed is based on the result of the determination as to whether or not the second special symbol is present, and it is also preferable that the jackpot holding within the holding is also the holding according to the second special symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14, the execution timing of the held consecutive suggested effects is set to the big hit end demonstration period. Whether or not the holding continuous suggestion effect can be executed is performed at the start of the special game execution, and is determined by lottery when the holding continuous suggestion effect execution condition is satisfied at the start of the special game execution. As a modified example, even if the hold rendition suggestion effect is executed immediately before or at the start of the big hit end demonstration, when the winning is performed in the execution lottery performed when the holding repetition effect effect execution condition is satisfied, Good.

  The condition for holding consecutive suggested effects is that the type of jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and the operation holding ball of one or more special symbols This is a condition that is satisfied when a large jackpot that results in a high profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) is included. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the special symbol operation holding ball, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold is not a high profit jackpot (if it is a 4R specific jackpot or a 4R regular jackpot), the hold is performed. The consecutive suggestion effect is not executed. More specifically, in a situation where there are a plurality of jackpot holds in the special symbol operation holding ball, the jackpot type relating to the previous jackpot hold is a low profit jackpot, and the jackpot type relating to the subsequent jackpot hold is a high profit jackpot. Does not execute the pending consecutive suggestion effect in the special game currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the hold consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the high profit big hit (16R big hit) is displayed on the fluctuation display within a predetermined number of times (4 rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it certain that it will occur, but also that the special game next to the special game for which the pending consecutive suggestion effect has been executed is not a low profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R regular jackpot). In addition, in this embodiment, the "special figure 2 priority digestion method" which preferentially digests the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol over the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol is adopted. The target operation-holding ball is limited to the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol.

  The pending consecutive suggestion effect is an effect that is executed during the jackpot end demonstration period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. Examples of the special image include an effect image composed of a still image, an effect image composed of a moving image, and an effect image composed of both a still image and a moving image.

  In the present embodiment, the hold consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only when the currently executed special game is a high profit special game (16R special game). In other words, the pending consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only in the super longevity effect as a large hit effect pattern. On the other hand, the over prize production and the bonus prize production can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game). In other words, the over-winning prize production and the bonus prize-producing production can be executed as any of the super longevity prize production, the longevity victory A production, the longevity victory B production, the joyous victory A production, and the joyful victory B production as the big success production pattern.

  In the present embodiment, during the execution of the pending consecutive suggestion effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus prize effect is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the pending consecutive presentation effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus prize effect. In other words, the pending consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the big hit end demonstration period, whereas the over-winning effect and the bonus win effect are not executed during the big hit end demonstration period, but are executed during the interval period. Because. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the pending rendition suggestion effect and the over-winning effect are not performed repeatedly, and the repetition suggestion effect and the bonus prize production are not performed repeatedly. The production and the over-prize production or the bonus prize production are performed independently. As a modified example, it may be configured to execute a pending consecutive presentation effect during a round game, in which case, the pending consecutive presentation effect and the over winning prize production may be performed in an overlapped manner, The bonus prize rendering effect may be performed in an overlapping manner. In such a configuration, the hold consecutive suggestion rendering has a higher display priority (the display of the over prize winning image or the bonus prize winning image is displayed on the back, Display), and if a special sound effect is generated during the hold continuous suggestion effect, the special sound effect is output with priority (reduce the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus win sound, or No output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the hold consecutive presentation effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus prize effect. Since the held in-house is a reward with a higher degree of profit for the player than the over-winning or bonus prize, the execution time of the on-hold in-house performance is set to be relatively long so that the player may not miss out. I try not to.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the held in-village effect is executed only as a “true effect” that definitely informs the establishment of the in-hold in-villa, but as a modified example, actually, You may also include a “gase effect” that has not been established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions of the held in-house casino effect, the condition is that the preceding operation-holding ball is a big-hit big hit (16R big hit) big hit hold, but is not limited to this. Instead, the preceding operation holding ball may be a jackpot hold other than the high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), that is, a jackpot hold corresponding to a low profit jackpot (4R jackpot).

  Further, by changing the display mode of the accumulated prize ball number display from the normal display mode (for example, white display) to the special display mode (gold display), it may be suggested that the reserved in-house is established. In addition, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of the highlight effect (highlight display) performed when the value of the accumulated prize ball number reaches the specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that the reserved in-house is established by the display mode of the highlight effect.

≪D. Promotion Direction ≫
The promotion effect indicates or informs a profit mode (hereinafter referred to as “temporary profit mode” for convenience) relating to the big hit before or at the start of the special game when a big hit occurs in the special symbol change display. Thereafter, during the execution of the special game, the effect suggests whether or not the actual profit mode relating to the big hit has a higher profit degree than the temporary profit mode. In other words, it indicates whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (exact profit mode) or false (high profit mode), and through the series of processes, the jackpot is determined. This is an effect that shows whether the profit mode of the user is promoted (changed).

  The types of promotion effects are roughly classified into round promotion effects and probable change promotion effects. The round promotion production is performed after the provisional round number in the state where the prescribed round number (provisional prescribed round number) of the special game suggested or notified at the time of the jackpot is uncertain whether it is a true round number or a false round number. This is an effect that suggests that the round game may continue. Some of the round promotion effects simply indicate that a round has been promoted, and some suggest that not only the round promotion but also the true prescribed round number or the long open round number. Probable change promotion effect is an uncertain state (a state of uncertain whether a jackpot type (temporary jackpot type) suggested or notified at the time of jackpot occurrence is a true jackpot type or a false jackpot type. ) Is an effect that suggests the possibility of shifting to the probable game state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, when promotion effects (round promotion effects, probable change promotion effects) occur during execution of the special game, it is definitive that the promotion is successful.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 16, the probable change promotion effect is performed when the first special symbol “4R specific big hit” is won in the normal game state, or when the second special symbol is used in the time saving game state or the probable change game state. This process is executed when “Right Big B Effect” is selected as the medium effect pattern of the big hit when the “4R Specific Big Hit” is won. The execution timing of this positive change promotion effect is set during the big hit end demonstration period. In this promiscuous promotion effect, the movable actor 24 is dropped and moved so as to overlap the screen, and then the movable actor 24 is moved upward again to display the title "Longevity" on the exposed screen. By doing so, it is an effect content that makes it appear as if it was promoted from “Ki-Ji-Jat-Ji-Jin” to “Shou-Ji-Ji-Ji-Ji” (the jackpot type was promoted from a 4R regular jackpot to a 4R-specific jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 14, when the round promotion effect is won in the second special symbol “16 specific jackpot” in the time saving game state or the probable change game state, the “jumbo jackpot B effect” is set as the jackpot medium effect pattern. Is executed when "" is selected. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. In this round promotion effect, the character "Final round" (a fake display) is displayed once on the screen to make it appear that the currently running round game is the last round game, and then this model The cut-in image of the message "I don't think so!" Issued by the main character of "" is displayed, and then the title "Super longevity jackpot" is displayed. (The jackpot type is changed from a 4R specific jackpot to a 16R specific jackpot).

  In the present embodiment, the round promotion effect can be executed only when the currently executed special game is “16R special game (high profit special game)”. Is a 16R special game (high profit special game) or a 4R special game (low profit special game).

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured such that the over-winning prize effect or the bonus prize-winning effect is not executed during the execution of the probable change promotion effect. In other words, the execution period (execution timing) of the probable change promotion effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus prize effect. In other words, the probable change promotion effect is executed during the big hit end demonstration period, whereas the over-winning effect and the bonus prize production effect are not executed during the big hit end demonstration period, but are executed during the interval period. It is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the probable change promotion effect and the over prize production will not be performed repeatedly, and the probable change promotion effect and the bonus prize production will not be performed repeatedly. The prize production or the bonus prize production is performed independently. As a modified example, a probable change promotion effect may be configured to be executed during a round game, in which case, a probable change promotion effect and an over-winning effect may be performed in an overlapped manner, and a probable change promotion effect and a bonus prize production effect may be performed. May be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the probable change promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over-winning image or the bonus image is displayed on the back or is not displayed). Also, if a special sound effect is generated during a probable change promotion effect, the special sound effect is output with priority (reduces or does not output the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus win sound). May be.

  In the present embodiment, the over-prize effect or the bonus prize effect can be repeatedly executed during the execution of the round promotion effect. That is, since the round promotion effect is executed from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round, if an over-winning or bonus prize occurs during the interval period, the round promotion effect execution period ( The execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus prize effect may overlap. Also, the round promotion effect has a higher display priority (the display of the over-winning image and the bonus image is displayed on the back or is not displayed), and a special sound effect at the time of the round promotion effect is generated. In this case, the exclusive sound effect may be preferentially output (the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound may be reduced or not output).

  Also, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to “31 seconds” from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the probable change promotion effect is set to the start of the big hit end demonstration. "20 seconds" from the time to the end is set. On the other hand, the execution time of the over prize production and the bonus prize production are each set to “0.5 seconds”. Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus prize effect. In addition, the execution time of the positive change promotion effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus prize effect.

≪E. Special production≫
The special effect is a highly rare effect that is executed when a predetermined extended-village condition is satisfied. The “predetermined extended holiday condition” means that the number of extended holidays at the big hit reaches the specified number (20 times in the present embodiment), and the type of the big hit at least at the specified number of times (20 times in the present embodiment) is the highest. This is a condition that is satisfied when a profit is a big hit (16R specific big hit). This special effect appears during the execution of the special game (16R special game) performed when the specified number of hits (the 20th hit) occurs. However, this special performance ends with the final round game (16th round) and does not include the end demonstration period thereafter (however, even if the final interval period is included, the final interval period is not included). May not be included). The special effect is made up of effect contents (special movie) in which the rare characters of this model, which are highly rare, are displayed one by one in order.

  In addition to the prescribed number of consecutive holidays, for example, the cumulative number of 16R specific jackpots in the extended state may reach a prescribed number of times in addition to the prescribed number of consecutive holidays (the 16R specific jackpot of the second special symbol is the prescribed number of times). It may be added to the conditions that the number of rounds or the number of accumulated prize balls in the extended state reaches a predetermined number. Here, “rensou (rensou state)” is, as described above, as a gaming state in the non-special gaming state, after the occurrence of the first hit which triggers the transition from the non-specific gaming state to the specific gaming state, It refers to a state in which the specific game state is continued without returning to the non-specific game state (a state in which a big hit in the specific game state is continuously occurring). "Specific game state" is a game state in which the transition probability to the special game is higher than that in the normal game state. In a broad sense, the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support A game state in which any of the functions is operating. In the present embodiment, the specific game state means a game state in which at least the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main game.

  In this embodiment, the special effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over prize production and the bonus prize production can be executed regardless of whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game).

  In the present embodiment, it is configured such that during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the extra bonus prize effect is not executed even if the over-winning prize or the extra bonus prize occurs. In other words, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect does not overlap with the execution period (execution timing) of the over-winning effect or the bonus prize effect. The reason is that when the special production and the over-prize production or the bonus prize production compete with each other, it is preferable to give priority to the execution of the rare special production (display of the premier character that can be seen only in the special production). This is because a satisfactory result is obtained for the player.

  As a modified example of the present embodiment, if an over-winning prize or an extra bonus prize occurs during the execution of the special effect, the over-winning prize production or the extra bonus prize production may be repeatedly executed. When the special effect and the over-winning effect or the bonus prize production are performed in an overlapping manner, the priority of the display of the special effect (the priority of the layer) is more than the priority of the display of the over-winning effect or the bonus prize effect (layer priority). (Priority) is preferably set higher. However, while special effects are effects that are displayed large on the entire screen, over-winning effects and bonus prize effects are effects that are displayed smaller toward the edge of the screen. The display priority (layer priority) of the over winning effect or the bonus prize effect may be set higher than the (layer priority).

In the present embodiment, the execution time of the special effect is set to “499 seconds” from the start of the big hit start demonstration to the end of the last (16th round) round game. On the other hand, the execution time of the over prize production and the bonus prize production are each set to “0.5 seconds”. Therefore, the execution time of the special effect is set to be longer than the execution time of the over-winning effect and the bonus prize effect.

  Note that if a power failure occurs during execution of a special game (for example, when power supply to a gaming machine is cut off due to a power failure or the like), if an over-winning prize or a bonus prize has occurred after the return of the power-off. After the power is turned off, an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect is executed. This can be executed because the decision to execute the over-winning effect and the execution of the extra-winning effect are triggered by the over-winning or extra bonus, that is, the event after returning from the power-off. On the other hand, the power-off return effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 after the power-off return does not include the data for restoring the held consecutive suggestion effect, the promotion effect, and the special effect, Since the power of the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200 is not backed up, if a power failure occurs during the execution of the special game, even if the execution conditions of each effect are satisfied or the execution timing comes at the time of the power failure, special Regarding the pending consecutive suggestion effects, promotion effects, and special effects that determine whether execution is possible at the start of the game, after the power is turned off, there is no data on whether or not these effects can be executed. Is not executed.

<Process on the main control board>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The process on the main control board 100 side includes a main control-side main process and a main control-side timer interrupt process.

《Main control side main processing》
35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the main control-side main processing of the main control board 100. In the main control-side main processing, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting at the time of power-on, the program starts, and the processing after S1 is started.

  First, as initial settings required at power-on, a start address is set as an initial value of a stack area in a stack pointer (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing a start address of a program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in a built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is ON (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9 described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch has not been turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read, and it is determined whether or not the power-off normal information is stored (S6).

If the power-off normal information is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described later. The sum becomes "0". In this way, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12 to be described later in order to return to the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, and the like, it requests an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 (S11).

  Next, in the power-off reset setting processing, the setting of the normal power-on information, the initial setting of various errors, and the initial setting of communication with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to store that the power-on was performed correctly, to store the power-on normal data in the power-off information flag, and to initialize the information of the power-off occurrence, Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power-off is read, and a power-off return process related to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Subsequently, a request for transmission of an effect control command ("power-off return command") at the time of power-off recovery between the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 is made (S15). The power-off return command includes information on the inspection of the communication line, the operation state of the special symbol, the number of times of probability fluctuation, the number of times of saving, the number of times of easy entry, the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the error state. Note that the command request for the untransmitted state before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request processing, the information of the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the power is turned off is read, and an effect control command including the information of the number of operation-reserved balls is requested ( S16).

  Subsequently, a return setting is performed to return the ordinary electric accessory 522 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the second starting port 52 is opened) (S17). Further, a return setting for returning the special electric auditors product 542 to a state before the power is turned off (for example, the special winning opening 54 is opened) is performed (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability change flag is read, and the operating state of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability change flag is a flag (a flag indicating that the special symbol probability variation function is in operation) for setting the operation probability (high or low probability) of the special symbol game. Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as an initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and a timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, as a preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, a clear word 1 ("55H") is set (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of power interruption, the value of the power interruption confirmation flag is read, and it is determined whether or not power interruption has occurred (S23). If no power interruption has occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In the initial value random number update processing, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the value of each counter is incremented by one, and when the value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”.

  Next, interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the timer interrupt processing (S25), and the process returns to the above-described processing of prohibiting the interrupt (S21), and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt processing to the occurrence of the next interrupt processing is used to execute S21 to S25. The process up to is repeated. Then, when an interrupt request is issued in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is permitted in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is ON in S23, that is, if power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26, and the following power-off process is executed.

Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), first, a clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in a power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if the information is not power-on normal information (S27: No), power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, a complement for the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, access prohibition is set in the RAM 103 (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<< Main control timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the main control-side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 at every fixed time (for example, 4 ms), and is executed in such a manner as to interrupt the main control side main process.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, a clear word 2 ("AAH") is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written into the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within the preset timeout time, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are periodically set so that the watch dog timer is cleared and restarted before the timeout. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, an input process is executed (S53). In this input processing, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, a first starting port switch 511, a second starting port switch 521, an operation gate switch 531, a special winning opening switch 541, a general winning opening switch 611, 641, a door opening switch, a frame opening switch, a back opening switch, a magnetic sensor. , Radio wave sensors, and the like, read the input information, determine their states, and store the detected information.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In the various random number updating process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the value of the random number counter is incremented by one, and when the value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”. On the other hand, as for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation addition pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (for example, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

  Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update processing, a random number per symbol, a soft random number per special symbol, and a symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”. When the value of the counter makes one round, the value of the corresponding initial random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, an initial value random number updating process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value “0”.

  Next, a timer subtraction process is performed (S57). In this timer subtraction processing, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of the various timers are decremented by the interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) related to the variable display and the stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72. In the special symbol game timer, a specified fluctuation time is set at the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and is decremented as the time elapses. In addition, when the small hit game of the other special symbol is executed during the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the small hit game is executed during the execution of the small hit game. The timing of the fluctuation display of the special symbol is interrupted.

  Next, a second startup port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In the second opening valid period setting process, the validity period and the invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and the validity period data or invalid period data of the second starting port 51 are set as a result of the determination.

  Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In the winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting port switch 511, the second starting port switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning port switch 541, and the general winning port switches 611 and 641 in the input processing (S53) is used. Based on the results of the switch passing inspection of the game ball, as a result, if it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the information indicating that the game ball passed each switch, the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180 And a transmission request for an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch. The details of the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In the prize ball control processing, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize, based on the detection result in the above-mentioned prize monitoring processing, and the payout control board 400 The communication inspection with the payout control board 400 is performed by monitoring the data received from the server.

  Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored. , The number of operation-reserved balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and a random number related to a normal symbol lottery is stored.

  Next, a normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In the normal symbol control process, a series of processes relating to the ordinary symbol display device 75 or the ordinary electric accessory 522 are performed. , A process during the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, a process during the demonstration of ending the operation of the ordinary electric accessory, and the like. In the normal symbol changing process, display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) so that the normal symbol is displayed in a variable or fixed manner.

  Next, a normal symbol change start monitoring process is executed (S63). In this normal symbol change start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the change start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, one normal symbol operation reserved ball is digested, and the normal symbol is depleted. , Determination of symbols, determination of a variation pattern, setting of a variation time, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, a starting port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start-up port monitoring control process, the winning of the game balls to the first start-up port 51 and the second start-up port 52 is monitored. A random number storage, a pre-reading notice effect determination, a command request for the number of symbols stored, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, a special symbol variation start process (S420), which will be described in detail later, and a special symbol variation process (S430) according to the value of the special symbol game status. ), A special symbol stop symbol display process (S440), and the like.

  Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit” or “small hit”, the setting of the start and end of the operation of the special electric auditors product 542 Updating of the opening time and the number of times of opening of the winning opening 54, setting of starting operation of the probability changing function, setting of starting operation of the changing time reducing function, setting of the changing pattern selection state, and the like are sequentially executed.

  Next, a special winning opening effective period setting process is executed (S67). In this special winning opening effective period setting process, the winning effective period and the winning invalid period of the special winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning opening 54 are set as a result of the determination.

  Next, a special symbol change start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol change start monitoring control process, if there is a first special symbol or a second special symbol operation reserve ball, the number of reserved balls is digested by one, a command request for the number of stored symbols, a special symbol hit / fail determination. The determination of the symbol of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time shortening function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric accessory, the setting of the demonstration effect time, and the like are sequentially performed.

  Next, an abnormality detection process is performed (S69). In this abnormality detection processing, based on the input information in the input processing (S53), a magnetic detection signal by a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, a radio wave detection signal by a radio wave sensor, a door / frame open signal, and the like are sequentially inspected. It is determined whether or not the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designating command”) including the error information is generated to request the effect control board 200 to display an error.

  Next, a ball entry time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In the entry ball passage time abnormality detection processing, when the ON signal of the prize detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, the entry ball passage time abnormality is set, and an effect control command (“error And an output request for a security signal to be output to an external terminal.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display processing, display data such as the number of times the special electric auditors product 542 is operated continuously (the number of prescribed rounds), the number of operation-reserved balls in the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the like are created. Further, display data for displaying information of the error state detected in the above-described abnormality detection processing on the state indicator of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, an LED output process is executed (S72). In the LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65) is performed in order to display a special symbol and a normal symbol, display the number of reserved balls, display the number of times the special electric accessory is continuously operated, and display an error. The display data created in the abnormality detection processing (S69), the game state display processing (S71) and the like are transferred to each of the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the ordinary symbol display device 75, each of the special symbol holding lamps 73 and 74, and the general symbol holding. Output is performed to the lamp 76, a status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, and the like, and the display of these various display devices is initialized.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this firing control signal output processing, when no communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a firing permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 and the firing of the game ball is permitted. I do. On the other hand, when the communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a firing prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit the firing of the game ball.

  Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate each electric accessory 542, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) are performed. An excitation signal is output to each of the electric accessory solenoids 623 and 643 based on the control data.

  Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read out of the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage unit 180 in the above-described process, and the effect control command is transmitted. The control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200.

  Next, an external information output process is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, game information relating to the gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal plate 600. As the external information signal, for example, a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (abnormal ball entry time abnormality etc.) signal, a big hit signal, a casino signal, There is a symbol confirmation signal and the like.

  Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main control-side timer interrupt processing is completed, the process returns to the main control-side main processing, and the main control-side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects a power interruption (a drop in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during the main control main processing or interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power-off confirmation flag is turned on. I do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-described power-off processing (S
26 to S32).

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

  First, a first starting port switch input process is executed (S101). In the first starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 has been input. When a detection signal is input from the first starting port switch 511, the first starting port winning data indicating that a game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a first starting port winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511, the process proceeds to the next step.

Subsequently, a second starting port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a second start-up winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step.

  Next, an operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 has been input. When a detection signal is input from the operation gate switch 531, operation gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed the operation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180, and the operation gate winning is performed. A command is generated and temporarily stored in a command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds to the next step.

  Subsequently, a special winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the special winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 has been input. When the detection signal is input from the special winning opening switch 541, the special winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. Then, a special winning opening winning command is generated, and this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

  Subsequently, a left general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 has been input. When the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input, the left general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered one of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is stored in the winning information of the main information storage unit 180. In addition to the temporary storage in the storage area, a left general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

  Subsequently, a right general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the right general winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 has been input. When the detection signal is input from the right general winning opening switch 641, the right general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

≪Special pattern game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-described starting opening monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric auditors control processing (S66), special symbol change start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. Is applicable.

(Start port monitoring control processing)
First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing details of the start-up port monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not a winning of a game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When a winning in the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

  If the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), a random number per special symbol, a random number per symbol, and a special symbol are determined as random numbers for the first special symbol game. The random number value of the variation pattern is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S203). Then, as an update of the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting port 51 is ended.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a winning of the game to the second starting port 52 has been detected (S205). When a winning in the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). If the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per symbol, and the special symbol are selected as the random number for the second special symbol game. The random number value of the variation pattern is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entry (S207). Then, as an update of the operation reserved ball count of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball count counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is ended.

  Subsequently, whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. Is determined (S209). If the number of activated balls has been updated (S209: YES), a symbol storage number command including information on the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is used as the main information storage means. 180 is stored in the command storage area (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is a pre-determination timing (S211). If it is the pre-determination timing (S211: YES), the special symbol perturbation is generated from a winning random number buffer (such as a reserved n storage area or a register) in order to generate pre-reading decision information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the starting opening. The numerical value is read out, and a prior / non-permission judgment is made (S212). Then, a pass / fail pre-judgment command including information on the pre-judgment result (pass / fail pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S213).

  In addition, a special symbol per symbol random number value is read from the symbol random number buffer, and symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-judgment command including the information of the pre-judgment result (symbol pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Further, a special pattern variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and a variation pattern preliminary determination is performed (S216). Then, a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment command including the information of the pre-judgment result (fluctuation pattern pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S217).

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68).

  In the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S68), a special symbol change start monitoring process to be described later is performed on the special symbol that satisfies the change start condition, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. When both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the change start condition, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed as described above.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is being made (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are on standby for change, that is, whether both the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are “00H (waiting for change)” It is determined whether or not it is (S302).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of operation-reserved balls of the second special symbol is “0” (S303). If the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S303: NO), the second special symbol is determined. Assuming that the symbol variation start condition is satisfied, the address of the second special symbol variation start monitoring table (the address of various tables used in the subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) is set (S304). Then, the process proceeds to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the second special symbol side. That is, in the present embodiment, when the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is present, the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol is given priority, regardless of the presence or absence of the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol. It is being digested. Details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). . Here, if the number of reserved balls is not “0” (S305: NO), it is considered that the first special symbol change start condition is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol change start monitoring table (hereinafter the address) After setting the addresses of various tables and the RAM storage area used in the processing (S306), the process shifts to the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) on the first special symbol side.

  If both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change start conditions are not satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol change start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol change start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309).

  In the special symbol change start monitoring process (S305, S309), the current change start is monitored with reference to the first special symbol change start monitoring table or the second special symbol change start monitoring table set in S304 or S308 described above. The processing on the target special symbol side will be executed. However, since the processing method is common to the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for the special case, the first special symbol side is processed. The processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether the processing is processing on the second special symbol side.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation-reserved balls on the special symbol side, which is the target of the current fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the subtraction is generated, and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the special symbol side which is the target of the fluctuation start is accessed, and the random number per special symbol stored in the earliest holding storage area (hold 1 storage area) and the special symbol The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random value are sequentially read out, and these random number values are used for a special symbol hit / fail determination process (S320), a symbol determination process (S330), and a variation pattern selection process (S423) to be described later. It is transferred to the special symbol hit / fail judgment area, special symbol pattern judgment area, special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment area, and special symbol fluctuation addition pattern judgment area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, as the update of the reserved storage area, the reserved sphere information stored in the reserved 2 storage area to the reserved 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reserved storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Subsequently, a special symbol hit / fail determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S320), first, a special symbol hit / no lottery table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability changing state, a high-probability winning / decreasing lottery table is acquired. If the gaming state is the normal state, a low-probability winning / decreasing lottery table is acquired. Next, a random number per special symbol is read from the special symbol hit / fail judgment area of the main information storage means 180. Then, referring to the special symbol win / fail lottery table, the special symbol win / fail determination is executed based on the random number value per special symbol. In addition, the values (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, and out-of-match data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the hit determination are stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Subsequently, a symbol determination process is performed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), a stop symbol of the special symbol and a character effect number (variable added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the hit determination. Then, the stopped symbols (symbol group) of the special symbols determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180. The character effect number is determined by the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group) and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (special symbol on / off special symbol on / off / normal symbol on / off). / 4 patterns of normal pattern probable variation OFF). If the result of the determination is incorrect, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the special symbol win / fail determination is a loss (S342: NO), the flow proceeds to S351.

  If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (S342: YES), after the big hit game ends, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning. The number of times of the probability variation is determined as the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (S345). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of the big hit winning, the number of times the special symbol changing time reducing function is activated after the end of the big hit game, Is determined (S346). Further, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of the big hit winning, the number of power support times is determined as the number of times the power chew support function is activated after the big hit game is completed ( S347). The results of this determination (the number of times of change in probability, the number of times of change in the time of change, and the number of times of power support) are stored in the time saving number storage area and the number of power support times storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, a specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, an opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

  Next, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the big hit game or after the small hit game is set (S349). Subsequently, based on the type of the symbol group determined in S330, a demonstration effect time (hit start demonstration time and hit end demonstration time) of a special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol hit / fail judgment area and the special symbol hit judgment area of the main information storage means 180 used in the above-mentioned special symbol hit / fail judgment processing (S320) and the symbol judgment processing (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from “00H (waiting)” to “01H (change start)” (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors product 542 is not operating, that is, whether or not the special electric auditors' game status is “00H (hit waiting state)” (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric auditors product 542 is not operated (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is not “00H (standby)” (S402).

  If the second special symbol game status is not “00H (waiting)” (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol. The address of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S403), and the routine shifts to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is “00H (waiting)” (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in the subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the first special symbol. The address of the various tables to be used and the address of the RAM storage area) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) described below, the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above-described S403 or S404 is used, and the special symbol to be changed this time is used. The processing on the symbol side will be executed. However, since the processing method is the same on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for the special case, is the processing on the first special symbol side? The processing will be described collectively without distinguishing whether the processing is on the second special symbol side. Details of the special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

  In the special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), a branch process (S411 to S414) for shifting to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H") is executed. I do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not “00H” (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “01H (change start)” (S412). When the special symbol game status is “01H” (S412: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol change start process (S420). Details of the special symbol change start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is “02H (changing)” (S413). When the special symbol game status is “02H” (S413: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol changing process (S430). Details of this special symbol change processing (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is “03H” (S414: YES), the process proceeds to a special symbol stopped symbol displaying process (S440). Details of the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol change start process)
Next, the special symbol change start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change start process (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the win / fail lottery, the variation pattern selection state, and the like (S421). Next, a special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number (S423).

  Next, a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as the setting of the special symbol change start, the change time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the change start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, a communication inspection command, a variation additional symbol information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, and a symbol designation command are generated in order to start the symbol variation effect on the effect display device 70, and these are generated as main information storage means. 180 in the command storage area.

  Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (change start)" to "02H (change start)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol change)
Next, the special symbol change processing (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol change processing (S430).

  First, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed in order to perform a special symbol change display (S431). In the display pattern number switching process (S431), display pattern number data of a special symbol is generated at every predetermined switching time. The display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) so that the special symbol is displayed in a variable or fixed manner.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has ended (S432). When the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends (S432: YES), a special symbol stop symbol to be definitely displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Next, a fluctuation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to display the decorative symbol is displayed, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S434).

  Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the final display time (S435). Note that the “determined display time” is a time period in which a stopped symbol is definitely stopped and displayed when the special symbol is stopped changing. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during fluctuation)" to "03H (stop symbol is being displayed)" (S436).

(Processing during special symbol stop symbol display)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol display processing (S440) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the special symbol confirmation display time has ended (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from “03H (stop symbol is being displayed)” to “00H (standby)” (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether the hit determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data “55H” (S443). If the hit determination data is the jackpot data (S443: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S444), the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function is stopped (S445), and the electric chew support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, “00H (off)” is set to the probability change flag, and “00H” is set to the probability change number counter, the change time reduction number counter, and the easy ball entry number counter to clear to zero.

  Next, as a special game start demonstration setting process, a start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (big hit start demonstration command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of times of execution of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric auditors product game status transits from “00H (hit waiting state)” to “01H (special game)” (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the content of the hit / fail judgment flag (S450).

  On the other hand, when the hit determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the special symbol probability changing function is operating (S451). If the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), the probability variation counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the amount of the current special symbol variation count (Step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after the subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation time reducing function is operating (S455). If the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455: YES), the time reduction counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the consumption of the current special symbol variation count (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable time reduction counter is zero (step S457). If the variation time reduction counter is zero (S457: YES), it is determined that the number of times of ending the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function is stopped (S458). If the variation time reduction counter after the subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the electric tube support function is operating (S459). If the electric chew support function is being operated (S459: YES), the electric support counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the amount of change of the number of times of the special symbol this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power support counter is zero (step S461). If the electric support frequency counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the number of times the easy entry state has been reached has been reached, and the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462). If the power support counter after the subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the routine goes to S463.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by one (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number. If it has reached, it switches to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the number of terminations has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 described above is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). The effect control board 200 sets and updates the effect mode based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric accessory control process (S66) will be described. 47 to 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors game status is “01H (special game)” (S501). When the special electric auditors product game status is “01H” (S501: YES), a special game process is executed in the subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is operating (S502). When the special electric auditors product 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether it is the operation start time of the special electric auditors product 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric combination 542 is a timing at which the operation of the special electric combination 542 is started in each round game.

  If it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the main information storage means 180 as a command. It is stored in the area (S504). The effect control board 200 executes a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game based on the information of the round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds). Then, the operation of the special electric combination 542 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as a process during the operation of the special electric combination 542.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric accessory 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the large winning opening 54 by a specified count (maximum winning number) (S506), and the operation time of the special electric accessory 542 is determined. It is determined whether (open time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, if the game ball has won the special winning opening 54 by the specified count (maximum winning number) (S506: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric auditors product 542 has elapsed (S507: YES), the special The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 has reached a predetermined specified round number (S509). When the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 is incremented by one (S510).

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the flow shifts to S511 to set an end demonstration display time as a special game hit end demonstration setting process. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S511).

  Subsequently, the fluctuation time reduction number information set in S346 is stored in the fluctuation time reduction number counter (S512). In addition, the power support frequency counter set in S347 is stored in the power support frequency counter (S513).

  Subsequently, with reference to the contents of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation by a specific symbol (so-called probable symbol) (S514). When the condition device is operated by the specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation number (operation data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation number counter of the main information storage unit 180, and the special symbol is stored. The operation of the probability variation function is started (S515). On the other hand, when the condition device is not operated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-operation data “00H” is stored in the probability variation counter, and S515 is skipped.

Next, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the time reduction counter is fluctuation time reduction function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S516). If the data is the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol is started (S517). On the other hand, when it is not the fluctuation time reduction function operation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the power support frequency information stored in the power support frequency counter is the power chew support function operation data (data other than “00H”) (S518). If the data is the electric-chu support function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the electric-chu support function is started (S519 to S521). That is, the operation start of the normal symbol probability variation function (S519), the operation start of the normal symbol fluctuation time shortening function (S520), and the start of the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 (S521) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if the data is not the operation support function function data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

  Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the change pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S523). The effect control board 200 sets the effect mode after the special game based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric auditors product game status is changed from “01H (special game)” to “00H (hit waiting state)” (S524).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the effect control board 200 includes a reset start process (including the effect control-side main process) executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, for example, after power-on, and an effect control-side timer interrupt that is started at regular intervals. Processing, reception interruption processing of an effect control command activated by a strobe signal from the main control board 100, and a ramp activated upon the arrival of a predetermined occurrence time specified in the time schedule of the variable effect pattern It is configured to include an effect interruption process and a transmission interruption process of an image control command that is activated at regular intervals.

  Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating a priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur. In this example, “reset start processing by power reset: top priority”, “reset start processing by various abnormalities: top priority” → “production control command reception interrupt processing: level 7” → “WDT (runaway detection)” The priority levels are ranked in the order of “reset start processing: level 3” → “image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2” → “production control timer interrupt processing: level 1”. The “reset start processing at the time of various abnormalities” may be performed, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an invalid command, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an invalid area or an invalid method, or when a DMA (Direct Memory) is used. Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the above-described plurality of types of interrupt processing are illustrated, but other interrupt processing actually exists.

In the effect control-side main process, basically, the process proceeds after setting any of the interrupt prohibition state or the interrupt prohibition state other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control-side main process enters an interrupt permission state, each interrupt process is started in a manner to interrupt the main process. In each interrupt process, when another interrupt process is requested during the execution of the interrupt process (multiple interrupts are generated), if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, basically, While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited if the interrupt process has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt process being executed. That is, each interrupt process is performed in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or lower priority levels are prohibited. Then, the process returns from each interrupt process to the effect control-side main process with all interrupts permitted. The priority (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is defined by register settings of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the reset start processing of the effect control board 200. In the reset start processing, the sub-main CPU 201 is activated by one of a power-on reset, a reset caused by various abnormalities, and a reset caused by WDT (runaway detection), and after the security check of the sub main CPU 201 is performed. , The program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required at power-on, a start address is set as an initial value of a stack area in a stack pointer (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as basic hardware settings, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub main CPU 201, and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, a memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and initialization by clearing to 0 is performed for a variable without an initial value. In addition, the sub-main CPU 201 loads the control program stored in the ROM 202 into the RAM 203 as appropriate.

  Subsequently, interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt processing are prohibited (S605). Next, a process of setting an error type to be made valid for the model, among various types of errors set in advance for each model, is performed (S606). Further, a turn-off request is made to turn all the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80) off (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is started to monitor runaway of the sub main CPU 201 (S608).

  Subsequently, the main processing of the game effect is executed as a main process on the effect control side (S609). Details of the effect control-side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process goes to the production control side main process in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main process to the reset start process. However, if the program returns to this process due to a bug in the program or the like, , A transition is made to a small power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced as compared with the normal operation.

《Direction control main processing》
Next, the production control side main processing (S609) of the production control board 200 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the production control-side main processing (S609).

  First, in the effect control-side main processing, an address (a head address where the program is developed) to start checking whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is acquired (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (the activation of various types of interrupt processing is permitted) (S612).

  Next, a device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode executed only once when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting), and is used to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the position information necessary for the operation. At the end of the initialization operation, movable movable object 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

  Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart the watchdog timer (S614). At this time, when the sub main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written to the WDT clear register of the sub main CPU 201 within a preset timeout period, and the watchdog timer is set. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Subsequently, an input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output processing S912 in the timer interrupt processing to be described later is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and a plurality of (for example, four) monitorings are performed. , The signal level is “1 (H level)” when the input port states are all “1”, the signal level is “0 (L level)” when all are “0”, and the signal level is otherwise. No change (this determines the input signal).

  Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In the error effect management process, various devices start an error effect based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. The error management timer is decremented and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error effect is terminated.

  Subsequently, an effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In the effect button monitoring control process, when the button announcement effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 within a predetermined effective operation time is monitored, and information on the input state of the effect button 15 is obtained. Hold.

  Subsequently, a preliminary lottery management process is executed (S618). In the preview lottery management process, a preview effect pattern that defines the content of the preview effect that occurs at each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern is set in accordance with the scenario of the variable effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. Further, an image control command for designating the notice effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated, and this is set in the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260. At this time, if the accessory announcement effect pattern is selected as the announcement effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). . In this example, instead of performing a lottery in one main loop process, all kinds of preview effects (notification effect patterns) occurring within one variation of the decorative pattern are improved in the main loop processing efficiency. In order to perform the lottery, the lottery is performed for a plurality of main loop processes separately for each generation time of the notice effect (for example, the fluctuation start stage, the reach generation stage, and the fluctuation stop stage). At that time, for the announcement effect that occurs at the start stage of the decoration symbol change, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the decoration symbol change (send the image control command immediately). It is supposed to do.

Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there are operation requests (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern ), Pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, accessory notice effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required for updating an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In the present example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for one frame drawing processing when drawing at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps) on the effect display device 70. Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, the control data (lamp data, drive data, and the like) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control timer interrupt process described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is completely completed in the later-described effect control-side timer interrupt process, the effect lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable auditorium 24 is stopped. Then, the control of the target device ends.

  Subsequently, a command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. If the effect control command is stored, this command is read out, and the read effect control command is read out. The effect control processing corresponding to the type of is performed. Details of this command analysis processing (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) has been performed during the current loop processing (S621). In the case immediately after the command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and shifts to the next loop process. On the other hand, if the command analysis has not been executed (S621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number updating process is executed until a predetermined time has elapsed (S622). In the present embodiment, “16 ms” which is a half of the minimum unit (32 ms) of the switching control of the lamp LP is set as the predetermined time. In the effect lottery random number update processing, various effect lottery random numbers such as a prefetching preview random number random number, a decorative pattern random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by one, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the value is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing (S622) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis processing (S622). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

  First, it is determined whether or not a gaming state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the change pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hold related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a pre-judgment command. If the hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to the hold information management process (S634). In the suspension information management process (S634), the symbol storage number command or the preliminary determination command is read from the sub main information storage unit 260, and the prefetch determination is performed based on the information of the preliminary determination result, and the reserved image of the effect display device 70 is displayed. A process for updating the display number and display mode (display color, etc.) of the reserved images displayed on the display unit 710 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. If the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination processing (S636). In the variation effect content determination process (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation related command is stopped for variation. If the command is a command, a process for terminating the fluctuation effect of the decorative symbol is executed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a jackpot effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the jackpot effect related commands include a jackpot start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a jackpot end demonstration effect command. If the big hit effect-related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process proceeds to the big hit effect content determination processing (S638). In the jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a small hit effect-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small hit effect-related commands include a small hit start demonstration effect command and a small hit end demonstration effect command. If the small hit effect-related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit effect content determination processing (S640). In the small hit effect content determination process (S640), a process for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a winning opening winning related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the winning opening winning command includes a first starting opening winning command, a second starting opening winning command, an operation gate winning command, a big winning opening winning command, a left general winning opening winning command, a right general winning opening winning command. And so on. When the winning opening winning related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to a winning effect content determination process (S642). Details of the winning effect content determination processing (S642) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S643). When the error effect designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to an error effect content determination process (S644). In this error effect content determination processing (S644), the error effect designation command is read from the sub-information storage means 280, and an error state is notified by displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 70, turning on the effect lamp LP, sound from the speaker 11, and the like. To determine the error effect pattern for

  In the case where the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO) Terminates the command analysis processing without doing anything.

(Prize-winning production content decision processing)
Next, the winning effect content determination processing (S642) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing details of the winning effect content determination processing (S642).

First, the first starting opening winning effect control process is executed (S701). In the first starting opening winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the first starting opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, a first start-up prize effect that notifies that a game ball has entered the first start-up port 51 is executed on condition that predetermined effect execution conditions are satisfied.

  Subsequently, a second starting opening winning effect control process is executed (S702). In the second starting opening winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. If it is stored, a second start opening winning effect that notifies that the game ball has entered the second start opening 52 is executed on condition that a predetermined effect execution condition is satisfied.

  Subsequently, an operation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In the operation gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not an operation gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. On condition that predetermined effect execution conditions are satisfied, an operation gate winning effect for notifying that a game ball has passed through the operation gate 53 is executed.

  Subsequently, a special winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S704). In the special winning opening winning effect control process (S704), it is determined whether a special winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the special winning opening winning command is stored. If so, under the condition that predetermined effect execution conditions are satisfied, a special winning opening prize effect notifying that the game ball has entered the special winning opening 54 is executed.

  Subsequently, a left general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S705). In the left general winning opening winning effect control process (S705), it is determined whether or not a left general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. If stored, on condition that predetermined effect execution conditions are satisfied, a left general winning opening winning effect for notifying that a game ball has entered one of the general winning openings 61 to 63 is executed. .

  Subsequently, a right general winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S706). In the right general winning opening winning effect control process (S706), it is determined whether or not a right general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub main information storage means 260, and the right general winning opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, a right general winning opening winning effect for notifying that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 64 is executed on condition that predetermined effect executing conditions are satisfied.

<< Processing control command reception interrupt processing >>
Next, the reception interruption processing of the effect control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an effect control command reception interrupt process. As described above, this effect control command reception interrupt process starts when an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in the interrupt process. It has become. The effect control command includes 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, the MODE data is also referred to as a “first command” and the EVENT data is referred to as a “second command” for convenience of description.

First, when an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command has been determined (S901). More specifically, the command value is read up to five times at the maximum, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice consecutively. This is because reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice consecutively.

  Next, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, an effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, the acquisition timing of the production random number is set at the time of receiving the production control command, because the production control command is transmitted at physically irregular timing such as at the time of starting winning of the game ball or at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Therefore, this is to prevent the acquisition timing from having a periodicity. By making the acquisition timing of the production random number random as described above, inconveniences such as the same production being repeatedly selected unnaturally in various production lotteries are less likely to occur.

  On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) → the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether there is no contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no inconsistency in the combination of the effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (write pointer) is obtained (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read out in the command analysis processing (S620) in the main processing, and the effect control processing corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<< Production control timer interrupt processing >>
Next, the effect control side timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the effect control timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at a predetermined time interval, and is executed in a manner of interrupting the above-described effect control-side main process.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and the processes in and after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as an effect control command reception interrupt from the main control board 100 and a watchdog timer interrupt, are permitted (S911).

  Subsequently, port input / output processing is executed (S912). In the port input / output processing, input / output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 is performed. In the input processing, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output processing, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub main information storage means 260 are read and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, a device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched at every interruption cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, an effect timer updating process is executed (S914). In the effect timer updating process, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are decremented and updated by an interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuating time of the decorative symbol, a timer for managing the generation timing of the notice effect, and the like. The effect timer manages the time schedule in the variable effect pattern, and manages the drive timing of the movable role object 24 and the lighting timing of the effect lamp LP on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Subsequently, a button control timer update process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective time of the operation of the effect button 15 is decremented and updated by an interruption period (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is a time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Subsequently, a task control counter update process is executed (S916). In this task control counter updating process, the value of the task counter (“0” to “15”) is updated every time a timer interrupt occurs. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", the value is incremented by one, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", the value is returned to "0". That is, the task counter can have a cycle of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned in accordance with the value of the task counter updated this time, and a ramp control task (lamp data update processing in S917), runaway monitoring is performed according to the value of the task counter. Tasks (image CPU runaway monitoring processing in S9189) and error management tasks (error management timer update processing in S919) are executed. In this example, of the task counter values ("0" to "15"), one value is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at 8 ms intervals from each other) are used for runaway monitoring. One value is assigned to the task and another value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the circulation period of the task counter is set to 16 ms in order to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of the effect lamp LP switching control. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and realizes synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

  Subsequently, a lamp data update process is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, the lamp data for a predetermined time is read from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) and the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit for switching the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The output process of the lamp data is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data into the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit converts the ramp data in the transmission buffer into serial data in byte units and outputs the data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, thereby outputting all the lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

  Subsequently, an image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In the image CPU runaway monitoring process, a toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. Accordingly, the image control board 300 executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. The toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which the H level / L level is alternately repeated every one frame time.

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is decremented and updated. Then, after all interrupts are permitted and the contents of the saved registers are restored, the effect control-side timer interrupt process is terminated, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Transmission interrupt processing of image control command >>
Next, transmission interruption processing of an image control command will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the transmission interruption processing of the image control command. The image control command transmission interruption process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interruption process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is obtained in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, a read pointer and a write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command has not been stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit specified as the output destination (S935). Thereby, the image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is updated by incrementing it by one (S937). Then, the transmission interruption processing of the image control command is completed, and the processing returns to the original processing before the interruption.

  The main effects achieved in this embodiment are summarized as follows.

  First, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of a special game, the over-winning effect is executed when the game ball enters the large winning opening 54 in excess of the prescribed count number, and the over-winning effect is executed. It is possible to clearly notify the player of the occurrence and enhance the satisfaction and elation of the player for having enjoyed special benefits that would not otherwise be obtained, and as a result, the interest of the game It is possible to improve the performance.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 54 during execution of a special game, a special winning opening winning effect (over winning effect) is performed, and the game ball is changed to the general winning opening 64. By giving a general prize mouth prize production (additional prize prize production) with the opportunity to enter the ball, a decrease is added between the large prize mouth prize production and the general prize mouth prize production performed during the execution of the special game Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotonousness of the large hit medium-sized production, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the general winning opening winning effect (additional winning effect) is performed. It is possible to prevent the player from being solely interested in advancing the game by aiming, so that the player can enjoy the fun of aiming for the general winning opening 64, and the player can actively play the game. It can be expected that the opportunity to make the ball enter the general winning opening 64 can be increased, and the gambling of the player can be increased, and the game can be made more interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased. Can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the special winning opening count-up effect in relation to the big hit end demonstration period and the interval period, the timing at which the special winning opening count-up effect is performed, Regardless of the number of consecutive winning opening count-up effects, etc., this special winning opening count-up effect can be properly completed without being unnecessarily delayed, so that a break between the preceding and following round games, a special game and the By clearly adding a break from the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the current game situation, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game Becomes In particular, by configuring so that the total execution time of the special winning opening count-up effect for the specified count is shorter than the execution time of the big hit end demonstration, a plurality of times can be obtained just before the end of the final round game. Even if a number of special winning opening count-up effects are performed continuously based on a game ball continuously entering the special winning opening, the special winning opening count-up effect will be performed within the big hit end demonstration period. It will be completed. As a result, the special winning opening count-up effect does not extend beyond the big hit end demonstration period to the fluctuation display after the end of the special game, and the time between the end of the special game and the start of the fluctuation display of the first rotation is not obtained. It is possible to clarify the break.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, if the execution condition of the subsequent special winning opening count-up effect is satisfied during the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect, the execution of the previous special winning opening count-up effect is performed. By starting the execution of the special winning opening count-up effect after the end, it is possible to prevent the processing of the counting effect from being complicated, and to separate the next two special winning opening count-up effects. By being clear, the accumulated prize ball count-up display does not become difficult for the player to see, and the player feels satisfied that the cumulative prize ball count increases one after another with a good tempo on the screen , And as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over-winning occurs, the accumulated prize ball number reaches a specific value and an enhanced effect is performed, or when an over-win is generated in a state where the emphasized effect is performed. By performing this enhanced production and the over-prize production at the same time, the irregular timing at which the number of accumulated prize balls reaches a specific number and the irregular timing at which an over-prize occurs are obtained. Can be clearly informed to the player by the appearance of both productions that this is a rare special situation that matches, so that the player's sense of excitement and achievement can be further enhanced, and as a result, Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a specific error with a relatively high priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult occurs and an over-win or bonus win occurs, For example, by limiting the execution of an over-winning effect or an extra-winning effect, it is possible to prevent a serious error from occurring in the gaming machine. On the other hand, in a situation where a non-specific error with a relatively low priority (importance) at which the continuation of the game is prohibited or difficult occurs, if an over-winning or bonus win occurs, an over-winning effect There is no particular harm even if the allowance of the bonus prize production is allowed. If the over prize production is disturbed by the error notification production, the player's willingness to play may be diminished. I'm going to run. By appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of the over-winning in accordance with the type of the error that has occurred in the gaming machine in this manner, the player's willingness to play the game without excessively obstructing the occurrence of the over-winning effect. Can be maintained, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the extended game is continued, the cumulative prize ball count is displayed not only during the execution of the special game but also in the power support state after the end of the special game, thereby It is expected that the player will proceed with the game while expecting to further increase the accumulated prize balls in the cottage, thereby further increasing the player's willingness to generate a big hit and improving the operating rate of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, the bonus prize production effect is executed when a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 arranged in the right area PA2, while the left area PA1 is executed. Is configured so that even if a game ball enters the general prize openings 61 to 63, the bonus prize production is not performed. (A rut) can be prevented, and the pleasure of prize winning in the general prize opening 64 that is incidentally generated as a result of launching a game ball for prize winning in the grand prize opening 54 is further enhanced. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over-winning prize and an extra bonus prize occur substantially simultaneously during execution of a special game, the over-winning effect and the extra bonus prize production are performed in an overlapping manner, so that As a result of playing a game aiming at the entry of a game ball, both the over-prize and the bonus prize, which have occurred incidentally, can be clearly notified to the player, so that the special game can be more interesting, The effect during the big hit can be prevented from being monotonous, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the execution of the over-winning effect or the extra bonus prize effect during the jackpot end demonstration period is limited, while the over-winning effect or the extra bonus prize effect is executed during the interval period immediately after the final round game. In spite of the fact that the special game is to be ended during the execution of the big hit end demonstration, any of the winning effects (over winning effect or bonus winning effect) is interrupted. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game effect without a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  According to the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are generated within a predetermined period during a special game, the execution of the multiple bonus prize productions is allowed, while the predetermined bonus during the special game is allowed. If a plurality of over-winnings occur during the period, only the over-winning effect corresponding to the first over-winning of the plurality of over-winnings is executed, so that the over-winning effect is not dark. , And the over-winning prize production can be prevented from becoming monotonous (turning into a rut). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, a prize ball signal can be output once when one game ball enters the general winning opening 64, but one game ball enters the large winning opening 54. With this configuration, the prize ball signal can be output twice so that the operating state of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating state of the gaming machine can be displayed on the data display. It is possible to notify the player and use the information as information for determining the selection of a gaming machine or as reference information for the game. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the cumulative prize ball number is reported by numerical information (for example, “1000 pt”). However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. May be configured to be notified.

  In the above-described embodiment, the count-up effect (large winning opening count-up effect, general winning opening count-up effect) with respect to the cumulative number of prize balls during the consecutive play has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Instead, even if the above-mentioned characteristic configuration is applied to a count-up effect (a special winning opening count-up effect, a general winning opening count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls during the execution of one big hit game (medium hit prize balls). Similar effects can be obtained.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment has basically the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration. The description will be omitted, and different portions will be mainly described. That is, in the following description, it is possible to apply a configuration common to the first embodiment except for a special case.

  Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described in order. The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment employs a small hit RUSH in which "small hits" frequently occur as a result of the special symbol determination when the game state is the latently variable game state. The playability of the small hit RUSH will be described later.

  The determination as to whether or not a special symbol is accepted according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically illustrating a special symbol winning / losing lottery table according to the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is not activated (low probability state), and (B) is a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated (high probability state). ). The special symbol hit / reject lottery table associates the random number range of the random value per special symbol with the result of the hit determination (big hit, small hit, miss). As shown in FIG. 56, when the special symbol is judged to be correct or not in the gaming state where the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is not activated (low probability state), the random number value per special symbol is in the range of “0 to 204”. Is a big hit if the special symbol probability variation function is activated (high probability state), and if the random number per special symbol falls in the range of "0 to 818", the big hit Becomes That is, when the special symbol probability changing function is activated, the winning probability of the big hit is changed from the low probability “1/320” to the high probability “1/80”. As described above, the jackpot winning probability changes according to the gaming state, but the jackpot winning probability is designed to be equal between the first special symbol hit / fail determination and the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Here, even if the result of the hit determination does not correspond to the big hit, in the hit determination of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability of "1 / 1.1". The winning probability per small hit is designed to be the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In the second embodiment, the small hit is set only for the second special symbol hit / fail determination. For example, a small hit is set for the first special symbol hit / fail determination, and the small hit is determined based on the first special symbol hit / fail determination. Also, the second special symbol may be configured to be determined to win a small hit with a higher probability.

In the second embodiment, the result of the determination as to whether or not one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a hit is a big hit. Is executed, the derivation of the big hit is prohibited as a result of the right or wrong judgment of the other special symbol, and only the small hit or the loss is derived. In the case where the result of the other special symbol hit / fail determination corresponds to a big hit, the result of the hit / fail determination is forcibly replaced with a deviation from the big hit. In other words, in the special symbol winning / losing lottery table, when the special symbol probability variation function is not in operation (low probability state), the random number per special symbol falls in the range of “0 to 204”. In such a case, if the result of the determination of the appropriateness is forcibly out of place (replaced from a big hit to out of place) and the game state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the special symbol hit disturbance is performed. When the numerical value falls within the range of “0 to 818”, the result of the determination of the correspondingness is forcibly out of place (replaced by out of place with a big hit). In addition, as a modified example, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol winning / losing lottery table, a big hitting no-lottery table that does not include the jackpot determination value (random number range) as a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is prepared. During the change display of the special symbol big hit, a small hit lottery in which the result of the hit judgment is only a small hit or a miss is performed by referring to the table dedicated to the big hit no-lottery process instead of the special symbol hit / no lottery table. A method may be adopted. In this modification, if the result of the hit determination is a specification for which a small hit is not set, a method of immediately determining an out-of-position without performing the hit determination may be adopted.

  Next, the big hit type (big hit breakdown) of the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination is “big hit”, the big hit type (big hit symbol, symbol group) is determined with reference to the special symbol big hit symbol table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram schematically showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 of each round are set with respect to the symbol random value per special symbol. Each of them is associated with one another (in this example, illustration of a stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol big hit table, four types of big hit types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into a 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), a 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), a 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and a 4R regular jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), the number of prescribed rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and the 4R regular jackpot (symbol group D) have the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game of 4 rounds, and a large prize in one round game The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

  FIG. 57 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. In the second special symbol big hit symbol table, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round are set with respect to the symbol random number per special symbol. Each of them is associated with one another (in this example, illustration of a stop symbol is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol big hit table, five types of big hit types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R regular jackpot (Symbol group I). The 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E) has a prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game of 10 rounds, and the open time (maximum open time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific big hit (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is six, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and the 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) have the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game of four, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal big hit (symbol group I), the prescribed number of rounds of the big hit game is two rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Among the various jackpot types, each jackpot except the 2R regular jackpot is a trigger for executing a long open round game in which the special winning opening 54 is opened for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers a short opening round game in which the special winning opening 54 opens for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the long open round game is a round in which the opening time of the special winning opening 54 is such that a specified number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls can be entered or easily entered in the special winning opening 54. It is a game. The short opening round game is a round game in which the opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set such that a specified number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls cannot be entered or difficult to enter in the special winning opening 54.

  Although not shown, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small hit symbols (symbol groups), and the second hit symbol is selected. At the end of the change display of the 2 special symbols, the selected small hit symbol (symbol group) is stopped and displayed. The opening / closing pattern (opening time, number of times of opening) of the special winning opening 54 in the small hitting game may be configured to be different depending on the type of the small hitting symbol.

  Subsequently, a gaming state according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of the gaming state and the effect mode in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, a “normal game state”, a “time saving game state”, a “probable game state”, and a “probable change game state” are set as a plurality of game states. As the types of the gaming state, (1) the gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is referred to as a “probable variation state” or a “probability variation gaming state,” 2) The gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time reduction function are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is referred to as a "latent probable gaming state (latency probable changing gaming state)" or "latency probable changing state". (3) A game state in which the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated without the special symbol probability variation function being activated is referred to as a "time reduction state" or a "time reduction game state". ) A state in which all functions are not operating is referred to as a “normal state” or a “normal game state”. Here, the “probable change game state”, the “probable game state”, and the “time saving game state” are all advantageous game states for the player as compared with the “normal game state”. Each game state is determined by a combination of an operation state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and an operation state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) Probable change game state is "high probability high base state", (2) latent game state is "high probability low base state", (3) time saving game state is "low probability high base state", (4) normal game state Can be expressed as a “low probability low base state”. Here, as for the special symbol fluctuation time reducing function, the fluctuation time of the special symbol which is the main player of the game in the game state among the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reduced. In other words, it can be said that the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function is activated because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is reduced in the game state (normal game state) in which the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is the main game. In the game state in which the change display of the second special symbol is the main player of the game (a time saving game state, a latent game state, and a probable game state), the change time of the second special symbol may be shortened.

  FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing a gaming state setting table in the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state to which the game is shifted after the end of the big hit game is set for each big hit type (type of symbol group). In the present embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win / fail determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is (A) a big hit type (a type of a symbol group) and (B) a game at the time of the big hit winning. It is set according to the state. The number of times each game state is continued (the number of times a special symbol is fluctuated) is the number of times that the probability fluctuating function of the special symbol is activated (the number of times of probable variation) and the time that the special symbol fluctuating time is reduced It is set based on the number of times of shortening (number of times of working hours reduction) and the number of times of power support (the number of times of power support operation) in which the power chew support function operates.

In the case of winning the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, after the end of the jackpot game The latent game state is set as the game state. In the case of shifting to the latent game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability change “100”, the number of times of shortening the change time “100”, and the number of times of electric support “0” are set. This latent game state is continued until the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed reaches the specified ST count (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified ST number (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the next special symbol change display is shifted to the normal game state.

  In the case of winning the “4R specific big hit 2 (symbol group C)” in the first special symbol, the probable change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit win. In the case of shifting to the probable change game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability change “100”, the number of times of change of the fluctuation time “100”, and the number of times of electric support “100” are set. This probable change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed reaches the specified ST times (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified ST times (100 times). When the probable change game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), a transition is made from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state.

  In the case of winning the "4R normal big hit (symbol group D)" in the first special symbol, the time reduction game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit win. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability fluctuation “0”, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction “70”, and the number of electric support “70” are set. This time-saving gaming state is continued until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed reaches the specified number of times (70 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of times (70 times). When the number of times the special symbol is changed reaches the specified number of times (70 times) and the time-saving game state ends, the next special symbol changed display is shifted to the normal game state.

  In the case of winning the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", and "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" in the second special symbol, the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning , The game state set after the end of the big hit game is different. Specifically, when the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the normal gaming state, the probability-changing gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming, and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning is the time-saving gaming state, the probability-changing gaming. In the case of the state or the latent game state, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the probable changing game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability change “100 times”, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction “100 times”, and the number of electric support “100 times” are set. In the case of transition to the state, the number of times of probability fluctuation “100”, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction “100”, and the number of power support “0” are set. Therefore, the probable change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed reaches the specified ST times (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified ST times (100 times). If the certain symbol game state ends when the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the next special symbol change display is shifted to the normal game state. Similarly, the latent game state continues until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed reaches the specified ST count (100 times) or the next big hit occurs within the specified ST number (100 times). When the latent game state ends when the number of times of the special symbol change display reaches the specified ST number (100 times), the next special symbol change display is shifted to the normal game state.

  In the case of winning the “4R specific big hit 2 (symbol group H)” in the second special symbol, the certain change game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game, regardless of the game state at the time of the big hit win. In the case of shifting to the probable change game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability change “100”, the number of times of change of the fluctuation time “100”, and the number of times of electric support “100” are set. This probable change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed reaches the specified ST times (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified ST times (100 times). When the probable change game state ends when the number of times of display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of STs (100 times), a transition is made from the next change display of the special symbol to the normal game state.

When the "2R normal big hit (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, the time-saving gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability fluctuation “0”, the number of times of fluctuation time reduction “70”, and the number of electric support “70” are set. This time-saving gaming state is continued until the number of times the special symbol is fluctuated and displayed reaches the specified number of times (70 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of times (70 times). When the number of times the special symbol is changed reaches the specified number of times (70 times) and the time-saving game state ends, the next special symbol changed display is shifted to the normal game state.

  As described above, the occurrence of the big hit can be a trigger for the transition of the gaming state, but the occurrence of the small hit does not trigger the transition of the gaming state. In other words, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the last variation display as the end condition of the gaming state (for example, the 100th rotation variation display of the positive variation gaming state and the latent reliable gaming state, Except for the state change at the 70th rotation), the gaming state at the time of the small hit winning is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed upon the small hit winning. In other words, if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hitting game and after the small hitting game is also the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the occurrence of the small hitting is the time reduction gaming state, The game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also a time saving game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is a positive change game state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the positive change game state. If the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is the latent game state, the game state during the small hit game and the game state after the small hit game are also the latent game state.

  Next, an effect mode according to the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the second embodiment, a normal mode, a time-saving mode, a latent mode, and a probable mode are set as a plurality of effect modes, and a game state (or a variation pattern) is set. Depending on the selected state) or the like, any one of the plurality of effect modes is selectively set, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed.

  Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the “normal mode” is set, and when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the “hour saving mode” is set, and the gaming state is the latent game state. At this time, the "probability mode" is set, and when the game state is the probable game state, the "probability mode" is set. However, when the game mode shifts to the normal mode based on the end of the non-normal game mode (time saving game mode, latent game mode, probable game mode), a predetermined number of fluctuation display immediately after the game mode shifts to the normal game mode. In, the special effect mode is set, and when the predetermined number of times of the fluctuation display have been completed, the normal effect mode is set. The predetermined number of times is “four times” as the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed. This means that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is “four times”. That is, the fact that the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times means that the total number of times of the variable display of the first special symbol and the number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol has reached “4”. In addition, as a modified example, only the variable display count of the first special symbol reaches the predetermined count (four times) or only the variable display count of the second special symbol reaches the predetermined count (four times). As an opportunity, the special mode may be ended (the mode may be shifted to the normal mode). Then, when any of the effect modes is set, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a back surface display of a decorative pattern is displayed on the screen) as an effect (variable effect) indicating that the user is staying in the effect mode. A background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. As described above, since the background image and the BGM are set to be different from each other for each effect mode, the player can recognize which effect mode is currently in stay from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Subsequently, the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a comparison table of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the second embodiment. In addition, in the second embodiment, the illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table is omitted, but in practice, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is the same as in the first embodiment. It is selected with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

  (A) in the figure shows the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the normal gaming state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to “3 seconds to 60 seconds” when the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, and is set to “30 seconds to 90 seconds” when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to “1000 seconds” when the result of the hit determination is a small hit or a loss, and is set to “30 seconds to 90 seconds” when the result of the hit determination is a large hit. ing. That is, as for the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, a fluctuation time (1000 seconds) which is much longer than other fluctuation times is set unless the result of the hit determination is a big hit.

  (B) in the figure shows the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the case where the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, a probable gaming state, or a latent gaming state. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to “1 second to 60 seconds” when the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, and is set to “30 seconds to 60 seconds” when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to “1 second to 3 seconds” when the result of the hit / fail judgment is out of order, and is set to “0.5 second” when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a small hit. If the result of the hit determination is a big hit, "30 seconds to 60 seconds" is set.

  Next, the ordinary symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram for explaining a normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows a normal symbol win / fail lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric accessory opening pattern table.

  The normal symbol hit probability is set to “1 / 1.02” when the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability variation function) is not activated, as shown in FIG. When the function (normal symbol probability variation function) is operating, it is set to “1 / 1.01”. For this reason, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, the hit is derived with a very high probability in determining whether or not the symbol is correct.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the electric chew support function (ordinary symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is not activated, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to “0.5 seconds”. When the function (ordinary symbol fluctuation time shortening function) is activated, “0.2 seconds” is set. That is, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to be extremely short regardless of whether the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Regardless of which variation pattern of the ordinary symbol is selected, the fixed stop time (determination display time) of the ordinary symbol is set to “0.1 second”. In addition, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the ordinary symbol is a time period in which the ordinary symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

  As shown in FIG. 61 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is “1 second opening → 2 second closing → 1 second closing” when the electric tue support function (open extension function) is not activated. Open → Close for 2 seconds → Open for 1 second ”, and set to“ Open for 5.9 seconds ”if the electric tue support function (open extension function) is operating. That is, as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522, the opening operation of one second is performed three times in the low base state, so that the total opening time is “3 seconds”, and in the high base state, it is 5.9 seconds. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is “5.9 seconds”.

Next, a description will be given of a simultaneous variation process (a variation interruption process and a variation forced stop process) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous fluctuation processing (the fluctuation interruption processing and the fluctuation forced stop processing) in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 71 executes the first special symbol display device 71 by executing the determination of the first special symbol variation start condition and the determination of the second special symbol variation start condition separately and independently. (Variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72) is carried out simultaneously and in parallel. In other words, by independently and independently digesting the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation-holding ball of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have their corresponding lottery lottery and change display. Etc. are performed in parallel. Therefore, even if the fluctuation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed for a long time, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the fluctuation display of the one special symbol. Is performed, the variable display of the other special symbol does not stop while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed. In the following, regarding the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the change display of the big hit is referred to as “big hit change display”, and the change display of the small hit is referred to as “small hit change display”. Is referred to as “outlier fluctuation display”.

(Change suspension processing)
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one special symbol is a large hit variation display, a small hit variation display, or a loss variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display. In a situation where the change display of one special symbol and the small hit change display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the change display of one special symbol ends, When the small hit change display of the special symbol ends, the change display of one special symbol is interrupted from when the small hit change display of the other special symbol ends to the end of the small hit game ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). The suspension of the variable display is used to mean a temporary stop of the variable display (meaning that the variable display will be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol ends, the measurement of the variation time related to the variation display of the one special symbol is resumed, and the measurement time of the variation time before the resumption and the measurement time of the variation time after the resumption are calculated. When the total time of the special symbols reaches a predetermined specified fluctuation time (a fluctuation time according to a design value), the fluctuation display of one of the special symbols ends.

(Fluctuation forced stop processing)
On the other hand, when the variation display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a large hit variation display and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display or a loss variation display, In the situation where the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display or the loss variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit variation display or the loss variation display of the other special symbol ends. Previously, when the big hit variation display of one special symbol is completed, the measurement time of the small hit variation display or the loss variation display of the other special symbol is set to a predetermined variation time (variation time according to the design value). Even before reaching, at the end of the big hit variation display of one special symbol, the small hit variation display or the loss variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. That. When the small hit change display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated, the symbol (fixed display symbol) stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit change display is replaced with a small hit symbol. . That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the loss variation display (the small hit game is consequently canceled). Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game (big hit game) in one special symbol competes with the special game (small hit game) in the other special symbol. In addition, when the change display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as the big hit change display, the change display of the other special symbol which starts to change after that is other than the big hit change display. Display as a fluctuation display (that is, display as a fluctuation display or a change in small hits, and if the random number corresponding to a big hit is determined in the hit / fail determination processing, forcibly replace the determination result with a loss and display the change as a loss). Is desirable. In addition, when the fluctuation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit fluctuation display, the fluctuation display of the other special symbol which starts to change later is out of the fluctuation display (whether a hit or a small hit corresponding to a big hit or a small hit in the hit judgment processing is performed). If it is a random number, the result of forcible / non-permissible determination may be forcibly replaced with a miss, and a miss variation display may be performed).

≪Playability of small hit RUSH≫
Next, the gaming performance of the small hit RUSH (latent mode) will be described. The small hit RUSH (latency mode) causes small hits to frequently appear in a second special symbol hit / fail judgment when a game ball is thrown into the second starting port 52, and the small hits until the big hit is won. It is a game property aiming to generate a hit game continuously and intensively.

  When the game state is the latent game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with a very high probability (1 / 1.02) in the determination of the success or failure of the normal symbol. In the latent game state (low base state), when the winning of the normal symbol is determined, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for one second three times. Therefore, if a right-handed shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to allow a game ball to enter the second starting port 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is in the open state. is there. Also, in this latent gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit in the determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the second winning when the small hit is won is determined. (2) Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), it is highly possible that small hits frequently occur based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 52.

  At this time, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins the small hit while the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for one second three times, the second special symbol is used. Is displayed in a very short time, and the small hit game is immediately started. Here, immediately after performing the opening operation for one second (excluding the third opening operation), the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs the closing operation for two seconds. Therefore, after the small hitting game is started, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 is closed while the normal electric accessory 522 performs the closing operation for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the special winning opening 54 through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hitting game, the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the ordinary electric accessory 522, and a large winning prize arranged diagonally below the movable member 524. By flowing down to the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the large winning opening 54. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability changing gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 52, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed with high frequency, and until the next big hit occurs, It becomes a game property to execute a small hit game with high frequency. Thus, each time a small hitting game is executed, about two to three game balls are made to enter the large winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are successively obtained each time, whereby the player Can play the game while increasing the number of balls.

  On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probable changing gaming state, the winning probability of a small hit in the determination of the second special symbol is extremely high, and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small hit games are likely to occur frequently. However, the following measures are taken to limit the playability of the small hit RUSH to only the latent game state, and to suppress the increase in possession balls due to the small hit game in game states other than the latent play state. Have been.

Specifically, when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probable change game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.01) in the determination of the correctness of the symbol in general. You. In this game state (high base state), when the winning of the ordinary symbol is determined, the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-handed shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to make the game ball enter the second starting port 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is in the open state. . Also, in this time-saving game state or the probable change game state, the winning probability of the small hit in the determination of the success or failure of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1/1. 1), and the small hit is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol at that time is set to be extremely short (0.5 seconds), small hits may frequently occur based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 52. high.

  Here, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins the small hit while the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol is displayed. The variable display is completed within a very short time, and the small hit game is immediately started. At this time, if the small hitting game is executed while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right area PA2. The playing ball that is played is extremely easy to enter the open ordinary electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the special winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, when the small hitting game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed (after the second starting port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operation gate 53. Is set to a very short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds) after the opening of the normal electric accessory 522 after the normal electric accessory 522 is opened. A game ball easily enters at 522. That is, during the execution of the small hitting game, the ordinary electric accessory 522 (the second starting port 52) is almost left open, and the game ball flowing down the right area PA2 is in the open ordinary electric combination. It is extremely easy to enter the object 522 (the second starting port 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the large winning opening 54 disposed downstream thereof. Therefore, when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probable change game state (high base state), the game ball reaches the large winning opening 54 even if small hits frequently occur in the determination of the second special symbol. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of payouts by the small hit game.

  Also, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (excluding the limited period), the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1/1. 1) in the determination of the second special symbol. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be extremely long (10 minutes or more), the player plays the game ball into the second starting port 52 to aim for a small hit. Even so, the efficiency of digestion of the second special symbol is extremely low, and small hit games cannot be frequently performed. In the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal game state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (second special pattern). The fluctuation time of the symbol is not extremely long.) In other words, the fluctuation display of the predetermined number of times immediately after the transition to the normal game state (the fluctuation display within four rotations) is more than the fluctuation display after the predetermined number of the fluctuation display ends (the fluctuation display of the fifth rotation and thereafter). The variation time of the second special symbol (the average value of the variation time) is shortened, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

  Here, in the second embodiment, during execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the cumulative prize ball number is displayed in the cumulative prize ball number display area 733 on the screen, and the cumulative prize ball number can be notified to the player. Is configured. If a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during the execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative display of the number of award balls is displayed (general winning opening count). Up effect) is performed. In addition, during execution of the small hitting RUSH (latency mode), when the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 in the small hitting game that is performed when the result of the right / wrong judgment of the second special symbol is a small hit. It is preferable that an additional display of the number of accumulated prize balls (large winning opening count-up effect) is performed. As a modified example, even if a game ball enters the general winning opening 64 during execution of the small hit RUSH (latent mode), no bonus prize production effect is performed, and the cumulative prize ball number is added and displayed (general winning opening). (Count-up effect) may not be performed.

Also in the second embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-described first embodiment, the same operation and effect as in the above-described first embodiment can be obtained, and as a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved.

  Note that, as a modification of the second embodiment, the second starting port 52 may be configured as a normally open winning port. That is, in the present modification, the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (starting ports that are always open), and usually do not have an electric accessory. FIG. 63 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, a second starting port 52 is arranged in a right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and a special winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally below and to the left thereof. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and includes a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting port 52 is a normally open winning port opened upward, and mainly allows game balls (right-hit game balls) flowing down the right area PA2 to enter. In other words, the second starting port 52 also serves as a general winning port 64 in which game balls flowing down the right area PA2 can always enter, and is in a special game state or a non-special game state. It is configured so that it can always enter the ball. In this modification, when a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning port 64) during execution of a special game, an additional bonus prize effect and the cumulative display of the number of award balls are displayed (general winning port count). Up production) is performed. Note that when a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning port 64) during execution of a special game, only the addition display of the number of accumulated prize balls (general winning port count-up effect) is performed. The winning effect may not be performed. Also, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 52 (general winning port 64) during execution of the small hitting RUSH (latent mode), no bonus prize production effect is performed, and the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed. (General winning port count-up effect) may not be performed.

[Common Modifications]
Next, a modification of the above embodiment will be described. The gaming machine according to this modification basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment or the second embodiment, and hereinafter, the same configuration is applied to portions having the same configuration. The description is omitted by attaching the reference numerals, and mainly different portions will be described.

<Common Modification Example 1>
In the above-described embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win / fail determination is a big hit, a normal positive change gaming machine that determines whether or not there is a positive change based on the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special symbol is employed. The present invention is not limited to this. If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a probable change according to whether or not the game ball enters a specific area during the execution of the big hit game. Probably changing gaming machines may be employed. Further, as a modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, a certain-variable gaming state which is given when a big hit occurs in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, with the limit number (upper limit number) set in advance as a limit. Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of continuous latent game states may be employed. Also, in the above embodiment, the special symbol probability variation function is configured as a normal probability changing machine that continues from the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs. (For example, 100 times) It may be configured as a number-of-turns-variable machine that operates continuously.

<Common Modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, a model in which only one large winning port is mounted in the gaming area has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a model in which a plurality of large winning ports are mounted in the gaming area is applied. You may. When a model equipped with a plurality of special winning openings is employed, a specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area) serving as an activation trigger of a special symbol probability variation function is provided as the above-described V-variable gaming machine. Two or more large winning ports, a first large winning port and a second large winning port not provided with the specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area), may be mounted. As an example of the board layout, a first special winning opening and a second special winning opening may be arranged substantially vertically or substantially side by side in the right region of the game area, or the first special winning opening may be arranged. The board area to be played may be different from the board area in which the second special winning opening is arranged. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game ball enters the first special winning opening (the number of unit prize balls) and the payout when the game ball enters the second special winning opening. The number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) may be the same or different. Of the two special winning openings, the first special winning opening (or the second special winning opening) is used for the small winning game, and the second special winning opening (or the first special winning opening) is used for the big winning game. May be configured as a special winning opening. In such a case, the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big winning port for the small hit game is 10 pieces, and the number of prize balls (unit prize balls) of the big winning port for the big hit game is 15 pieces. Good.

<Common Modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability changing gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time reduction function are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the latent probability changing game state is defined as a game state in which only the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated and the fluctuation time reduction function of the special symbol and the electric chew support function are not activated. You may. In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is divided into a first special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and a second special symbol fluctuation time reduction function, so that the latent probable change game state can be changed to the special symbol probability fluctuation function and the second special symbol probability fluctuation function. (2) The game state may be defined as a gaming state in which the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, the electric tuner support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), but also the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time). It may operate independently of the shortening function).

  Next, in order to make it easier to grasp the technical significance of the above-described embodiments and modifications, problems corresponding to the above-described embodiments and modifications will be outlined.

  Conventional pachinko gaming machines are known to execute a special winning opening prize effect (for example, displaying the number of prize balls or outputting a sound effect) when a game ball enters the special winning opening during execution of a special game. (See, for example, JP-A-2013-123602).

  Further, among conventional pachinko gaming machines, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that outputs game information relating to the operating status of the gaming machine or the like as an external information signal to an external device arranged outside the gaming machine (for example, “ JP-A-2003-325923).

  However, since there are already many pachinko gaming machines adopting such a configuration as conventional models, in order to differentiate from the conventional models, further improvement in the amusement of the game is required. . In addition, since there are already many pachinko gaming machines that adopt this configuration as conventional models, in order to differentiate it from conventional models, it is necessary to manage the operating status of gaming machines more appropriately. It has been demanded.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machines according to the above-described embodiment and the modified example adopt the above-described configuration and achieve the above-described effects in order to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be appropriately improved without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the components described in the above embodiments and modifications are appropriately combined, or some of the components described in the above embodiments and modifications are partially deleted or converted by well-known / common techniques. Those that are included are also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko gaming machine PA Gaming area PA1 Left area PA2 Right area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Rendering button 20 Gaming board 51 First starting port 52 Second starting port 53 Operating gate 54 Big winning opening 64 General winning opening 70 Effect display device 71 first special symbol display device 72 second special symbol display device 100 main control board 200 effect control board 220 effect control means 300 image control board 400 payout control board 500 power supply board 600 external information terminal board 541 big win switch 641 left general winning opening switch

Claims (1)

A game board on which a game area is formed,
A starting port provided in the game area and allowing a game ball to enter,
Hit / fail judgment means for executing a hit / fail judgment in response to the entry of a game ball into the starting port,
A large winning opening that is provided in the game area and is opened according to the result of the hit / fail determination by the hit / fail determination means and in which a game ball can enter;
A unit for opening the special winning opening until the number of game balls entering the special winning opening reaches a specified number or until a specified time has elapsed, when the result of the determining of the hit by the determining unit is a big hit. Special game execution means that can shift to a special game that repeats the game a plurality of times,
An effect display device on which an effect display is displayed;
And a sound output device for outputting the effect sound,
The execution period of the special game is a start demonstration period that is a period set from the start of the execution of the special game to the start of the execution of the first unit game, and the execution of the last unit game from the start of the execution of the first unit game. A unit game execution period that is a period up to the end, and an end demonstration period that is a period set from the end of the execution of the last unit game to the end of the execution of the special game,
The game area has a predetermined winning opening that is provided in the game area and can enter a game ball,
During the execution of the special game, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect triggered by a game ball entering the predetermined winning opening,
Even if a game ball enters the predetermined winning opening during execution of the special game, the predetermined effect is not executed during the end demonstration period,
When a game ball enters the predetermined winning opening during execution of a special game, the special winning opening from the end of execution of a certain unit game until the start of the next unit game of the certain unit game is closed. During the unit game execution waiting period, which is a period during which a predetermined effect is executed,
If the number of game balls entering the special winning opening in one unit game exceeds the specified number, the specified number exceeded condition is set, and during the execution of the special game, the specified number exceeded condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute a specific effect that indicates or informs that the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening in the unit game of the number exceeds the specified number,
When a plurality of game balls enter the predetermined winning port within a predetermined period in one unit game, a plurality of predetermined effects can be executed corresponding to each of the plurality of game balls. While
Even if the number of game balls that trigger the satisfaction of the specified number excess condition within a predetermined period in one unit game is plural, only one of the plurality of game balls is used. A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can execute only one corresponding specific effect.